RLSS UK National Pool Lifeguard Qualification E MANUAL 2022

THE LIFEGUARD
Candidate manual
NATIONAL POOL LIFEGUARD

NPLQ Generation 9
QUALIFICATION
Candidate manual
Sixth Edition (third revision) published in 2022 by

Royal Life Saving Society UK (RLSS UK)
Tel: 0300 323 0096
Email: info@rlss.org.uk
www.rlss.org.uk
Text © Copyright 2022 by RLSS UK

‘National Pool Lifeguard Qualification’ is a registered UK trademark of The Royal Life Saving Society UK.
All rights reserved. This publication has been produced to facilitate the teaching of the National Pool Lifeguard
Qualification by RLSS UK qualified instructors. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a
retrieval system or transmitted in any form by any means electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or
otherwise, without the prior written permission of the copyright owners. All enquiries regarding any extracts
or re-use of any material in this book should be addressed to the publishers, RLSS UK.
Acknowledgements
We gratefully acknowledge the help of all those who contributed to the development of the National Pool
Lifeguard Qualification.
First Edition 2001

Second Edition 2003
Third Edition 2006
Fourth Edition 2012
Fifth Edition 2016
Sixth Edition 2018
Sixth Edition (first revision) 2019
Sixth Edition (second revision) 2021
Sixth Edition (third revision) 2022
Copyright
© Copyright 2022 The Royal Life Saving Society UK (RLSS UK)
4262-1-0419
Artwork, illustrations and photography © Copyright RLSS UK

Published by RLSS UK
CANDIDATE’S NAME:
Royal Life Saving Society UK

Tel: 0300 323 0096
www.rlss.org.uk
foreword
Welcome to the Lifeguard Candidate Manual – a resource to support you whilst training for the National Pool
Lifeguard Qualification (NPLQ).
Training as a Royal Life Saving Society UK Lifeguard means you are joining a community of lifesavers across
the UK and the world. As part of this community, you not only have an opportunity to save lives but you can
enhance them too.
When you achieve the NPLQ, you become an ambassador of safe swimming wherever you are. In your
swimming pool at work, in a school delivering a water safety assembly, or even at the end of a night out
when you’re making sure your mates avoid waterways and get home safely.
The Royal Life Saving Society UK (RLSS UK) is a charity committed to enhancing communities in the UK
and Ireland, so everyone can enjoy being in, on or near water safely – because every life is worth saving. The
NPLQ was first developed in 1990 but has its roots back to 1891 when the charity was first founded with
a mission - to introduce lifesaving skills into swimming pools to prevent drowning. RLSS quickly became
renowned for this mission around the world.
Over 130 years later, the charity continues to develop the NPLQ to be at the cutting edge of the high
standards required in modern pools. Now developed in consultation with the leisure industry, the latest
revision of NPLQ Generation 9 recognises developments in aquatic safety and includes guidance from the
Health and Safety Executive publication - Managing Health and Safety in Swimming Pools (HSG 179/2018).
The NPLQ is the most recognised swimming pool lifeguard qualification within the UK and Ireland and is
awarded to over 40,000 people each year.
As a RLSS UK Lifeguard, you have the potential to safeguard many thousands of lives and ensure those
individuals enjoy water safely. You also have the opportunity to explore further development and have
many paths open to you. These include leisure management, qualifying to deliver NPLQ training to others,
becoming a Community Lifesaving Instructor to impart essential water safety education or even training as an
Open Water or Beach Lifeguard.
Whatever path you take, as a RLSS UK Lifeguard with a NPLQ, you will always be part of an extensive
community of lifeguards, trainers, volunteers, fundraisers, and others, all with the same vision - nations without
drowning where everyone can safely enjoy being in, on or near water. I invite you to become a Lifeguard
Member of RLSS UK too – you can find out more about the benefits of this on our website www.rlss.org.uk.
I wish you good luck in your training and future career as a RLSS UK Lifeguard.
Welcome to our lifesaving community.
Mark Smith
President
Royal Life Saving Society UK and Ireland
NPLQ Generation 9
Introduction
This training manual and workbook has been designed to guide you through the National Pool
Lifeguard Qualification and contains all the information you require to help you to become a
lifeguard and prepare you for the assessment at the end of the course. This manual should also be
used as a revision document if you are successful on this course and then choose to renew your
qualification within 24 months.
This qualification sits on the Regulated Qualifications Framework

The sections of this publication have been laid out for ease of use to guide you through the course:
Section One – The Lifeguard, Swimming Pool and Supervision
Section Two – Intervention, Rescue and Emergency Action Plan
Section Three – Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation, AED and First Aid
This manual is made up of three sections and each section is made up of three elements.
At the end of each element there is a revision area with questions to assist the learning process. In the
appendices at the back of the workbook we have summarised the assessment that you will need to pass
at the end of the course to gain your qualification.
The course duration will depend on the number of qualifications that are added. 100% attendance
is required.
To obtain the RLSS UK National Pool Lifeguard Qualification you will need to demonstrate the practical
skills and demonstrate an understanding of the full syllabus of skills to the required standard through
continual assessment by the trainer throughout the course.
If the above criteria are met and you are able to reach the required standard by the end of the course, the
trainer will put you forward for independent assessment of the RLSS UK National Pool Lifeguard Qualification;
this will include theory and practical elements from the full syllabus taken directly from this manual.
The Royal Life Saving Society UK’s online store selling equipment, clothing and products for everyone involved in
Lifeguarding, Lifesaving and Emergency Response.
shop.rlss.org.uk
NPLQ Generation 9
Why do pools have lifeguards?
To enable people to swim in a safe, friendly and fun environment. Lifeguards in attendance and supervising
at swimming pools mean that drownings in the UK and Ireland are low. However, effective lifeguards are
essential as one drowning is one too many.
Swimming is one of the most popular leisure activities enjoyed by millions of people each year, of all age
groups, swimming abilities and in different pool activities. Lifeguards are essential to the safe supervision of
these pool users.
In the UK and Ireland, lifeguards provide a vital role by observing, supervising and educating pool users,
and on occasion are prepared to carry out a rescue.
Lifeguards help the pool operator meet their duty of care, comply with industry guidance and the law.
What do lifeguards do?

Working as a lifeguard is a rewarding and enjoyable job. You get the opportunity to work in a team within
a swimming pool environment, with a wide range of people, personalities and public making the job
interesting.
An important part of a lifeguard’s role is to intervene and prevent accidents. Your rescue skills may not
be called upon for some time and hopefully not at all if the pool is well run and the lifeguards are diligent.
However, not all accidents and medical emergencies can be prevented and that is when your lifesaving
skills will be put into action.
In addition to your supervision duties, building presentation and customer service will form much of your
role during your shifts and you may also be involved with:
• Customer enquiries
• Setting up and taking down equipment throughout the facility
• Cleaning
• Teaching and coaching
Be prepared to work hard in maintaining high standards of cleanliness in and around the swimming pool
environment. It is important that customers have a good experience of their visit and keep returning. Think
how swimmers and families would feel getting changed in dirty changing areas. Would you want to visit a
swimming pool and use dirty facilities?
3
Before we get going, let’s see what you can see in the video...
What did you see?
Answer the following questions:

How many adults? ________________
How many children and infants?_______________
How many swim aids are in use?______________
Where would you intervene?
Did you see anything dangerous or potentially dangerous?
This course will train you to deal with these and many more situations, and you will be able to supervise a
pool, intervene, react and rescue, and work effectively as a team.
Good luck, we hope you enjoy the course!
NPLQ Generation 9
SECTION 1
The lifeguard, swimming
pool & supervision
ELEMENT 1
The Lifeguard & The Law
ELEMENT 2
Swimming Pool, Hazards
& Control Measures
ELEMENT 3
Swimming Pool Supervision
5
Section 1 The Lifeguard, Swimming Pool and Supervision
CONTENTS
Element 1: 2.6 Risk Assessment...................................................35
2.6.1 Hazards Categories...................................36
The Lifeguard and the Law
2.7 Sample Normal Operating Procedures.................36
1.0 The Role of the Lifeguard........................................7 2.7.1 Potential Risk Factors...............................36
1.1 Accountability..........................................................8 2.7.2 Systems of Work.......................................37
1.1.1 Overview of Health and Safety Law as 2.7.3 Operational Systems.................................37
it Applies to Lifeguarding.............................8 2.7.4 Opening and Closing Checks....................37
1.1.2 Background to the Law and Regulations...10 2.8 Common Features/Hazards in all
1.1.3 Acts...........................................................11 Pool Environments................................................38
1.1.4 Regulations................................................12 2.8.1 Premises....................................................38
1.1.5 Guidance...................................................13 2.8.2 Common Poolside Equipment..................41
1.2 Maintaining Standards..........................................14 2.8.3 Common Pool Features............................43
1.3 Working as a Team................................................14 2.8.4 Supervision of People Hazards –
1.4 Uniform and Equipment........................................15 The Swimmer ...........................................49
1.4.1 Jewellery....................................................15 2.8.5 Task and Activity Hazards.........................51
1.5 Customer Care......................................................15 2.9 Detailed Work Instructions....................................54
1.5.1 Maximising the Customer Experience......15 2.10 Activity Hazards.....................................................55
1.5.2 Customer Care Policy...............................16 2.11 Supervision of Specialist Activities
1.5.3 Methods for Customer Care......................17 and Equipment......................................................59
1.5.4 Customer Care whilst Maintaining
Revision : Section 1 Element 2.......................................65
Supervision................................................17
1.5.5 Customer Perception................................18
1.5.6 Dealing with Complaints...........................19
1.6 The Pool Operator.................................................21 Element 3:
1.6.1 Induction Training......................................21 Swimming Pool Supervision
1.6.2 Ongoing Training and Competency
3.0 Maintaining Supervision on Poolside through
Assessment...............................................23
Supervision, Observation and Intervention ..........66
1.6.3 Individual Training and Competency
3.1 Early Intervention and Accident Prevention..........66
Assessment Records................................23
3.2 10:20 Scanning System........................................67
1.7 Risk Assessment...................................................23
3.3 Programmed and Unprogrammed Sessions.........67
1.8 Pool Safety Operating Procedures – PSOP..........24
3.4 Lifeguard Zones....................................................68
1.9 Other Policies and Procedures..............................25
3.4.1 Shared Zones............................................69
1.9.1 Safeguarding.............................................25
3.4.2 Individual Zones........................................70
1.9.2 Equality and Diversity................................25
3.4.3 Lifeguard Zone Cards ...............................72
1.9.3 Post-traumatic Stress Disorder (PTSD).....26
3.5 Scanning ...............................................................73
1.9.4 Admission Policy for Children...................26
3.5.1 Scanning Patterns.....................................74
1.9.5 Environmental Policy.................................26
3.6 Maintaining Concentration....................................77
Revision : Section 1 Element 1................................. 27-28 3.7 Lifeguard Numbers and Positions.........................78
3.7.1 Patrolling Lifeguard...................................78
3.7.2 High Chair..................................................79
Element 2: 3.8 Visibility..................................................................80
Swimming Pool, Hazards and 3.8.1 Reflection and Glare (Natural Light)..........80
Control Measures 3.8.2 Blind Spots................................................81
3.8.3 Pool Lighting.............................................81
2.0 Types of Swimming Pools.....................................29
3.8.4 Turbulence.................................................81
2.1 Details of the Pool.................................................30
3.8.5 Water Clarity..............................................81
2.1.1 The Design................................................32
3.9 Maximum Pool User Loads...................................82
2.1.2 The Size of the Pool...................................32
3.10 Lifeguard Rotation.................................................83
2.1.3 The Shape of Pool, Gradients
3.11 Use of Technology for Lifeguards..........................84
and Features..............................................32
3.12 Lifeguards Duties and Responsibilities.................86
2.2 Leisure Pool...........................................................32
3.13 Communication on Poolside.................................87
2.3 Diving Pool............................................................33
3.13.1 Types of Communication...........................87
2.4 Traditional/Competition Pool.................................34
3.13.2 Communication Equipment and Alarms...90
2.4.1 Olympic Pool.............................................34
3.14 Details of Alarm Systems and Emergency
2.4.2 Health Club Pool.......................................34
Equipment and Maintenance Arrangements.........91
2.5 Outdoor Pools and Lidos......................................35
2.5.1 Lifeguarding Outdoor Pools......................35 Revision : Section 1 Element 3................................. 93-94
NPLQ Generation 9
ELEMENT 1 –
Swimming POOL & SUPERVISION

THE LIFEGUARD AND THE LAW
SECTION 1: THE LIFEGUARD,

What we will cover
In this Element we will cover what the role of the lifeguard involves.
1.0 The Role of the Lifeguard

Question – what do you think are the essential traits and skills required to be an excellent
lifeguard?
The role of the lifeguard on poolside is to maintain a safe and healthy environment for swimmers through:
Maintaining a positive attitude

• Fully understand your responsibility as a lifeguard as people’s lives are in your hands.
Your attitude and the way you behave will affect the public’s and your colleague’s perception of you,
and will impact on the way individuals respond and react to you as a lifeguard.
Being professional
• Show respect to your colleagues and all customers
• Be smart and presentable at all times
• Strive for excellence by aiming to exceed customer’s expectations whilst they are using the facility
Maintaining observation
• Remain alert to observe swimmers within the whole pool environment
Providing good supervision

• Supervise swimmers and monitor activity
within the swimming pool
Early intervention
• Act immediately at the first signs of any action
that could lead to a potential incident to
prevent an incident or emergency developing
Accident prevention
• Educate pool users, prevent dangerous
behaviour and ensure pool rules are followed
at all times
Rescue
• Act immediately and rescue any swimmer
who may be in difficulty or require first aid
Attributes of a lifeguard:
• Strong communicator
• Excellent team player
• Able to lead
• Anticipate problems
• Extremely observant
• Quick thinker
• Able stay calm
• Good with people
• Have a positive attitude
7
ELEMENT 1 – THE LIFEGUARD AND THE LAW
1.1 Accountability
What does this mean?
As in all jobs you are accountable for your actions. When something goes wrong, the law asks that those
actions are scrutinised to see whether you personally were effective or ineffective during an incident and
whether you worked in line with your training and the pool’s procedures. With lifeguarding it is important to
remember that your actions or inactions will impact on the development of an emergency and the outcome.
It is very important to note that the outcome of an emergency situation is not always successful, even with
the best supervision and response. However, the lifeguard must always act and perform in a professional
manner in accordance with your training. After an incident or accident in a swimming pool, an investigation
will usually follow and one of the first things investigated will be the actions of the lifeguard.
To help ensure that you are not vulnerable during any such investigation, always follow your training and
listen carefully from the beginning of your induction to your regular ongoing training to ensure you remain
well trained, competent and able to act effectively in an emergency.
1.1.1 Overview of the Health and Safety Law as it Applies to Lifeguarding

To begin with we are going to give you a brief outline of the Law, what is means to you, your employer and
the people who use swimming pools and leisure centres. There is no direct law relating to the management
of swimming pools, however you and your employers are bound by a duty of care which is contained
within relevant Health and Safety law in your country, together with a number of other regulations. In this
section we have selected some of the most relevant aspects of the law, describing how they affect you and
your roles and responsibilities as a Lifeguard.
Below is the basic outline of some of the legal responsibilities of an employee (you) and your employer,
as well as suggested areas of best practice. You should refer to the law in your own country for further
information on your roles and responsibilities.
Lifeguards must:
• Take reasonable care of the health and safety of themselves and others
• Contribute to safety arrangements and the development of Pool Safety Operating Procedures
• Immediately report any loss of, or obvious defect, in any personal protective equipment issued by the
employer
• Co-operate with their employers to enable them to carry out their responsibilities
• Not interfere with or misuse anything provided in the interests of health and safety or welfare
• Use machinery, equipment, chemical substances and safety devices in accordance with the training
and instruction provided
• Notify their Manager of any work situation that represents, in the view of the employee, a serious and
immediate danger to health and safety or a shortcoming in the protection arrangements for health
and safety
Your Employers must:

• Protect the health, safety and welfare of their employees at work, and also members of the public
using their premises
• Provide good information, instruction, training and supervision to enable employees to work safely
• Carry out a risk assessment in the workplace, review it regularly and take all steps necessary to make
the workplace safer
• Develop Pool Safety Operating Procedures (PSOP), and make sure every member of staff
understands them and follows them
• Provide and maintain safe and healthy working conditions, equipment and systems of work for its
employees
NPLQ Generation 9
operator’s operator’s
responsibility responsibility
Legal Requirement – Legal Requirement –
Health and Safety at Work Management of Health and
etc Act 1974 / 1978 (NI) Safety at Work Regulations
Section 2 – Employer’s responsibility 1999 / 2000 (NI)
to employees (NI PT 2.4) Regulation 3 – Risk assessments
Section 3 – Employer’s responsibility Regulation 5 – H&S arrangements (e.g.
to people other than their employees i.e. NOP)
public (NI PT 2.5) Regulation 8 – Arrangements for serious
and imminent danger (e.g. EAP)
Regulation 9 – Contact with external
services (e.g. EAP)
Regulation 13 – Capabilities and training
operator’s YOUR
responsibility responsibility
Industry Guidance Legal Requirement – Health
HSE Publication, Managing Health and and Safety at Work etc Act
Safety in Swimming Pools (HSG 179) 1974 / 1978 (NI)
BS EN 15288 Section 7 – Employees to take
IS EN 15288 reasonable care of themselves and
anyone else who may be affected by
their actions i.e. Public. (NI PT 158)
To follow and apply Pool Safety
Operating Procedures
To cooperate with employer on health
and safety matters and ongoing training
9
1.1.2 Background to the Law and Regulations

Health and Safety Law establishes parameters within which employers and indeed you, as an employee,
must operate and these are established into a structure of Acts of Parliament and Regulations. In addition
to these acts and regulations, we are provided with a range of publications which provide us with guidance
and information in order to run swimming pools safely.
Acts of Parliament (Acts)

Acts of Parliament make up the primary legislation (so over arching) within the UK and Ireland and can
apply to businesses and individuals both in general society and also whilst at work.
Some examples of Acts of Parliament relevant to lifeguarding are the:
• Health and Safety at Work Act etc 1974 / 1978 (NI)
• Equality Act 2010 UK
• Safeguarding Vulnerable Groups Act 2006 / Safeguarding and Vulnerable Groups (NI) Order 2007
• Environmental Protection Act 1990
• The Protection of Vulnerable Groups (Scotland) Act 2007
Regulations (Regs)
Health and Safety law makes provision to enable regulations to be made, and enacted into law, again
these directly impact on businesses and individuals.
The main purpose of the regulations is to ensure that all employees and members of the public are not
injured or harm caused to their health by the activities of businesses, such as a swimming pool.
Guidance on Swimming Pool Management

As we saw in the flow chart, guidance sits underneath law and is designed to assist the operator in
meeting its legal obligations set out in the Acts and Regulations mentioned above.
HSE Guidance
The Health and Safety Executive (HSE) in the UK publish extensive guidance to assist businesses to
operate in a safe manner. Particular guidance known as Managing Health and Safety in Swimming Pools
(HSG 179) has been written to assist pool operators in the safe operation of swimming pools.
HSE guidance is not law but can be used by courts to consider if swimming pool operators have complied
with the requirements of the primary legislation.
British and European Standards (BS EN), Irish Standards (IS EN)
British and European Standards are technical in detail and provide standards by which buildings and
equipment should be designed, and they also provide standards for operation. British and European
Standards are not law, but as with HSE guidance, can assist swimming pool operators in demonstrating
they have taken reasonable measures to comply with the legislation.
Industry Guidance
Many industry publications are available and are also designed to assist swimming pool operators in
deciding what safety arrangements to have in place; for example when planning swimming lessons or
specialist activities such as diving. Again this guidance is not law.
NPLQ Generation 9
The tables below indicate some of these laws, standards and guidance and how they impact on the role of
a lifeguard. These are some of the key references and not intended to be comprehensive.

1.1.3 Acts
Title Effect on Lifeguarding
The Health and Your employer must comply with this Act and in doing so will set out
Safety at Work etc appropriate arrangements. To ensure you meet your obligations you must:
Act 1974/ 1978 (NI) • Take reasonable care of your own and other people’s health and safety
The Safety, Health • Follow the training you have received when using any work items your
and Welfare Act 2005 employer has given you
(Ireland) • Co-operate with your employer on health and safety
• Tell someone (your employer, supervisor, or health and safety
representative) if you think the workplace or inadequate precautions are
putting anyone’s health and safety at risk
The Corporate The Corporate Manslaughter and Corporate Homicide Act 2007 is a landmark
Manslaughter and in law. For the first time, companies and organisations can be found guilty of
Homicide Act 2007. corporate manslaughter as a result of serious management failures resulting
(UK only) in a gross breach of a duty of care resulting in a death.
Your role is to follow your training, adhere to the procedures set out by your
employers and act responsibly when carrying out lifeguard duties.
Health and Safety This Act provides courts with greater sentencing powers for those who break
(Offences) Act 2008 health and safety law including increased penalties (fines) and for certain
Schedule 3A Health breaches by an individual can include prison sentences.
and Safety at Work It is therefore essential, as with all of the above, that you follow the training
(NI) Order 1978 your employer provides and that you undertake your roles and responsibilities
as lifeguard seriously and in accordance with site procedures. Not following or
breaking the rules, under this Act, could result in very serious consequences.
The Equality Act The Equality Act 2010 aims to protect people with disabilities and prevent
2010 (UK only) disability discrimination. It provides legal rights for people with disabilities in
the areas of:
• Employment
• Education
• Access to goods, services and facilities including larger private clubs
and land based transport services
• Buying and renting land or property
• Functions of public bodies, for example the issuing of licences
The Equality Act also provides rights for people not to be directly
discriminated against or harassed because they have an association with
people with disabilities. This can apply to a carer or parent of people with
disabilities. In addition, people must not be directly discriminated against or
harassed because they are wrongly perceived to have disabilities.
Safeguarding This Act provides for a vetting and barring scheme for people who work with
Vulnerable Groups children and vulnerable adults. The purpose of the scheme is to minimise the
Act 2006 risk of harm posed to children and vulnerable adults by those that might seek
Protection of to harm them through their work.
Vulnerable Groups As an employee who is likely to work with children and vulnerable adults, your
(Scotland) Act 2007 employer will ask you to undergo a check as to your suitability to work with
these groups. You will be required to satisfactorily complete this check prior
Safeguarding
to commencing employment.
Vulnerable groups
(NI) Order 2007 In addition, your employer will have procedures in place to protect against any
harm to vulnerable individuals or groups and you will have a duty to uphold
these arrangements.
11
1.1.4 Regulations
The Management of These regulations ask your employer to make specific arrangements for the
Health and Safety health, safety and welfare for you , your colleagues and people who use the
at Work Regulations facility you work in. As a more detailed document, some examples of the
1999 (MHSAWR) specific provisions within these regulations are:
• Risk assessments
• H&S Arrangements such as consulting with you, Operating Procedures
or Emergency Procedures, Training
• Capability & training
Your role in all areas is to:
• Co-operate with your employer by upholding the arrangements which
have been put in place to protect people
• Attend and follow the training provided
• Do not interfere with these arrangements or any equipment you are
provided with to carry out your role
• To engage with your employer if you feel more can be done to protect
the safety of everyone who uses or works in the facility
Control of COSHH is the regulation that requires employers to control (manage potential
Substances risks) from substances that are hazardous to health. In a swimming pool
Hazardous to Health environment you are likely to come into contact with chemicals relating to the
Regulations 2002 pool itself or cleaning chemicals. Having identified these risks and measures,
(COSHH) to prevent you from harm, your employer will have put in place procedures
COSHH (NI) 2003 which you have a duty to follow. These measures might include wearing
protective equipment or supplying safety data sheets.
Registration, The Registration, Evaluation, Authorisation and restriction of Chemicals.
Evaluation, REACH requires the people who place chemicals on the market
Authorisation (manufacturer and importers) responsible for understanding and managing
and restriction of the risks associated with their use. Then in turn to also ensure that they
Chemicals 2021 provide a high level of protection of human health and the environment from
(REACH) the use of chemicals.
First Aid at Work Requires, amongst other things, the employer to conduct a first aid needs
Regulations assessment to decide such things as the number of first aid boxes required,
1981 / 1992 (NI) the number and levels of qualifications of first aid trained staff.
Manual Handling The Manual Handling Operations Regulations 1992 apply to a wide range
Operations of manual handling activities, including lifting, lowering, pushing, pulling or
Regulations 1992 carrying. The load may be either inanimate - such as a box or a trolley, or
animate - a person. The Regulations also offer practical advice for employers,
managers, safety representatives and individual employees on how to reduce
the risk of injury from manual handling.
It is essential as a lifeguard that you fully understand the procedures set out
by your employer. Once again training will be provided by your employer.
You will be required to set up heavy equipment and in extreme cases may
have to ‘land’ a casualty when performing an in-water rescue.
Personal Protective The main requirement of the PPE Regulations is that personal protective
Equipment equipment is to be supplied and used at work wherever there are risks to
Regulations 2022 / health and safety that cannot be adequately controlled in other ways.
1993 (NI) (PPE) The Regulations also require that PPE:
• Is properly assessed before use to ensure it is suitable
• Is maintained and stored properly
• Is provided with instructions on how to use it safely; and is used
correctly by employees
NPLQ Generation 9

Health and Safety The Regulations require employers to use a safety sign where there is a
(Safety Signs and significant risk to health and safety that has not been avoided or controlled
Signals) Regulations by the methods required under other relevant law, provided use of a sign can
1996 help reduce the risk.
Your employer will provide training in the types of signs used in the facility
WARNING
you work in. In summary these are types of signs which you will need to be
Examples of ‘Danger’ usage familiar with:
(i) Prohibition sign – a sign prohibiting behaviour likely to increase or cause
danger (e.g. ‘no access for unauthorised persons’)
(ii) Warning sign – a sign giving warning of a hazard or danger (e.g. ‘danger:
electricity’)
MANDATORY SAFE CONDITION
(iii) Mandatory sign – a sign prescribing specific behaviour (e.g. ‘eye

Examples of ‘Must Do’ usage Examples of ‘Safe Way’ usage protection must be worn’)
(iv) Emergency escape or first-aid sign – a sign giving information
Emergency
telephone
on emergency exits, first aid, AED location or rescue facilities (e.g.
‘emergency exit/escape route’)
The Electricity at These regulations require your employer to develop procedures, registers
Work Regulations and testing mechanisms, by approved providers, to maintain and test any
1989 / 1991 (NI) systems or equipment powered by electricity.
Your role is to co-operate with your employer in line with these regulations
and to ensure all procedures and training is upheld. Your employer may
require you to complete visual checks prior to using electrical equipment such
as checking the plug, flex, pins of the plug etc.
Fire Legislation Under the Regulatory Reform (Fire Safety) Order 2005, Fire (Scotland)
The Fire Safety Act 2005 your employer must carry out a fire safety risk assessment, and
Regulations (NI) 2010 implement and maintain a fire management plan. Your employer may require
you to complete fire safety checks of a building, e.g. ensuring all fire exits are
unlocked and clear from obstructions.
1.1.5 Guidance
Managing Health and Managing Health and Safety in Swimming Pools has been produced to
Safety in Swimming help pool operators comply with health and safety law. Similarly British and
Pools (HSG 179) European guidance is also available to operators.
BS EN 15288 Part 1 In following the guidance your employer will have set out written procedures
& 2 Swimming pool for the safe operation of the pool through a document called Normal
safety requirements Operating Procedures (NOP) and procedures in which established
for design and arrangements for dealing with an emergency are set out called an Emergency
operation Action Plan (EAP). Having been trained in these procedures your role as
BS EN 13451 a lifeguard is essential. Your understanding of these procedures and the
Swimming pool actions you must take in implementing them are central to your role in
equipment, general safeguarding lives.
safety requirements Other industry guidance is available for specific activities and operations
and test methods within leisure facilities. Where relevant your operator will have made the
necessary arrangements to comply with or follow such guidance.
Safe Supervision The guidance is aimed at the owners and operators of all swimming pools
For Teaching and where teaching or coaching takes place, and at those who undertake such
Coaching Swimming activities. It deals with risk assessment, safety supervision and the safe ratios
of pupils to teachers and coaches.
13
1.2 Maintaining Standards

The challenge in any job or business is to maintain high standards. However, due to the nature of the
role it is essential that lifeguarding standards are always maintained; as they can not only impact on the
overall smooth running of the facility, failure to maintain the highest possible standards can compromise
safety standards and potentially put people in danger with possible fatal consequences. You are personally
responsible for maintaining standards – public safety is in your hands.
1.3 Working as a team

Working in a leisure centre, teamwork is essential and you must not only be able to work well with
members of the lifeguard team, but also other members of staff within the facility e.g. reception, gym,
swimming teachers or management staff.
A well-trained team is more effective than a lifeguard would be if they were working as an individual.
Having other well-trained staff on hand is essential, not only in an emergency but for the normal day-to-day
operation of the pool environment. Knowing that you have a well trained team to back you up gives you
confidence that you can enter the water and put a casualty first during a rescue.
It is also important that there is consistency within the lifeguard team in the way that pool rules and
supervision of swimmers is applied to avoid inconsistencies.
NPLQ Generation 9
Uniform and equipment

1.4

Lifeguards not only need to be competent and
qualified, they also need the correct kit including a
uniform, whistle, basic first aid equipment and in
most lifeguarding situations have a suitable rescue
aid for immediate action in an emergency, i.e. a
torpedo buoy.
Uniform should not hinder a lifeguard in a rescue
situation. Shorts and t-shirt are a suitable uniform,
and red and yellow colours – (the internationally
recognised colours for lifeguards), are commonly
used. It is important that lifeguards are easily
recognisable in an emergency so the public know
who to call for if an incident is developing.
Uniform is provided by your pool operator and will
be issued to you as part of the induction to the job.
As a lifeguard, being smart and presentable is an
important part of maintaining standards and giving
the right impression to swimmers and members of
the public.
1.4.1 Jewellery
Whilst carrying out lifeguard duties or training it is
important that any items of jewellery which could
potentially cause an injury to you, your colleagues
or the casualty are removed (e.g earrings,
bracelets, chains).
Body piercing and jewellery permanently attached to the body present additional hazards, particularly to
the lifeguard during an in-water rescue. Where such jewellery is worn, when on duty, exposed items must
be removed and those less obvious or hazardous should be securely covered to minimise the risk of injury.
RLSS UK recommend that:
Lifeguards must never take personal mobile phones or personal smartphones onto poolside, surrounding
areas or changing rooms. This could lead to an unnecessary distraction where lifeguards could miss an
incident or the opportunity to prevent an incident from developing. The same principle applies for other
smart technology such as a smartwatch, music player or other similar device.
Policies and procedures at swimming pool facilities should consider the inclusion of details of how
operators will be minimising distractions to enhance the lifeguard’s ability to remain vigilant.
1.5 Customer Care

Providing an efficient friendly service to all customers is important when seeking to improve the experience
customers have when they access swimming pools.
1.5.1 Maximising the Customer Experience

Excellent customer service creates loyal customers; customers who are willing to speak positively about your
swimming pool to their family, friends and coworkers. As such an important element to a successful facility,
employers will have a plan in place to deliver excellent customer service. This plan may include the following:
• Customer care policy
• Customer care charter
• Customer care rules
• Methods for obtaining and replying to customer feedback
• Methods for obtaining and replying to staff feedback
• Customer care training for staff
• Key performance indicators
15
1.5.2 Customer Care Policy

Customer care policy
A customer care policy is a written document for employees so that they know what to do and how to
behave when dealing with customers. A good customer service policy should ensure a better service
to customers. A good customer care policy, followed by employees could be the difference between
a customer choosing your swimming pool or another. A customer service policy will also include the
procedures and processes for managing and handling customer complaints.
Customer care charter

A customer care charter is a written policy that tells customers what they can expect from the organisation
with regards to customer service. This will include information about how the facility services will be
delivered and what the expected outcomes are from a customer perspective. A customer care charter is a
framework for defining service delivery standards so that employers and customers know what to expect.
Customer care training for staff

Training for staff in customer care policies and procedures will provide an employee with a greater
understanding of the impact that their roles has within an organisation. Training in customer care will have
the following positive benefits:
• Improvements in customer communication
• Improvements in problem solving
• Higher employee motivation
• Employee engagement in organisation matters
• Increased customer service standards
• Improved customer retention
• Increases in company profit
Key performance indicators

Key performance indicators or KPIs are a method by which an employer can measure targets towards their
objectives. Sometimes KPIs can be used for individuals or there can be team KPIs. In customer care KPIs
could be used to check on simple things, like how quickly the telephone was answered or how a customer
rated the cleanliness of the changing rooms. From a lifeguard and customer care perspective then KPIs
could be used to determine the following:
• If the lifeguard was in the correct lifeguard position
• If the lifeguard was alert and attentive
• If the lifeguard was holding a rescue aid
• If the lifeguard was scanning their zone
• If the lifeguard was wearing the correct uniform
• If the lifeguard had a whistle with them
Customer care rules

Within a customer care policy your employer will set the rules for managing customer care. These rules
may include information on how quickly a telephone should be answered or for a swimming pool, rules
about how to behave, such as no running on poolside. Lifeguards should be aware of the customer service
rules prior to commencing work as a lifeguard. An employer will train lifeguards during their induction about
the specific rules of a swimming pool facility. Generally, customer care principles should include:
• Being knowledgeable about your swimming pool products and services
• Being a good listener
• Being friendly to customers
• Being helpful to customers
• Being respectful to customers
• Being responsive to customers
• Being proactive in receiving customer feedback
• Being able to say ‘Thank you’
NPLQ Generation 9
1.5.3 Methods for Customer Care
Methods for obtaining and replying to customer feedback

Receiving and acting on customer feedback will inform an employer how they can make improvements
to the service that is delivered. It is crucial for determining how satisfied customers are with your services.
There are several ways in which customer feedback can be obtained:
• Customer emails or telephone calls
• Customer comment forms
• Customer email or telephone surveys
• Customer focus groups
• Social media platforms
• Website live chat
• Review websites
• Mystery visits
The employer will set out, within their customer care policy and customer care charter, appropriate
methods of responding to customer feedback. These methods will include information about who would
respond and in what timeframe. In some instances, employers will display positive feedback to encourage
further feedback from customers. Employers may also display negative feedback and their response to
demonstrate the action that has been taken.
An alternative to traditional methods of customer feedback is a Net Promoter Score. The Net Promoter
Score is a survey with one question that measures overall customer satisfaction and measures the loyalty
of a customer with an organisation.
Methods for obtaining and replying to staff feedback

Receiving and acting on staff feedback will inform an employer how they can make improvements to the
service that is delivered and to the wellbeing of their staff. It is crucial for determining how satisfied staff are
in their employment. There are several ways in which staff feedback can be obtained:
• One to one conversations
• Staff meetings
• Staff surveys
• Staff focus groups
• Staff suggestion box
• Organisational social media platforms
• Staff appraisals
• Exit interviews
The employer, will set out, within their staff handbook or customer care policy, the way in which they will
respond to staff feedback. Staff feedback systems can make the employee feel listened to and provides
a way of getting information to help their employer and solve issues quickly. Staff feedback systems are
designed to make employees part of the decision-making process.
1.5.4 Customer Care whilst Maintaining Supervision

It is your job to maintain a relaxed but controlled and safe environment in the pool, ensuring users have
an enjoyable experience. Excellent communication skills and an understanding and friendly manner with
people are therefore an essential set of skills.
If there is a potential discipline problem, the following pointers will help prevent a misunderstanding
developing between you and the customer:
• Be approachable and smile
• Establish eye contact
• Be courteous, fair but firm
• Give reasons for any guidance or instruction
• Do not display anger or use inappropriate language
• Never try to intimidate pool users
• Remain calm as this will help to control the situation
17
Communication is a two-way process. A sensible approach is to always try to put yourself in the other
person’s position and try to understand their feelings. If there is a problem, find out what it is and where
possible resolve it yourself or inform other members of the team who can assist you. Remember if you
are carrying out supervision duties then always follow your training and ensure that supervision is not
compromised while helping customers, e.g. talking to a customer for too long.
Watch video of a poor example of how to ask a customer to change lane.

How would you do this better?
1.5.5 Customer Perception

Lifeguards need to work hard to ensure the customer perception of a lifeguard is a positive one and only
you and your team can influence how others or customers see you.
Customer perceptions of a lifeguard should be:

• They safeguard lives
• They anticipate problems, intervene early to
prevent accidents
• They give peace of mind
• They are professional and can be relied upon
• They communicate effectively and advise
swimmers
• They offer excellent customer service
• They are a centre representative
• They are friendly
Sometimes customers may have negative perceptions of a lifeguard such as:

• They are a baby sitter
• They prevent swimmers from having fun
• They are a whistle blower and health and safety enforcer
• They are lazy
• They are daydreamers
• They are unprofessional
Lifeguards need to be perceived positively and need to be alert and ready to intervene early at any
given moment.
NPLQ Generation 9
Below are some examples of poor and unprofessional lifeguard activity:
• Lack of respect for customers and staff

• Talking to public or staff unnecessarily whilst supervising the pool
• Being distracted by public or staff unnecessarily whilst supervising the pool
• Using any personal device such as a mobile phone or smart watch
• Chewing gum or eating whilst on poolside
• Untidy and poorly presented uniform
• Not standing or sitting in the appropriate place
• Poor body language
• Coming into work tired or hungover from the night before
The above are just a few examples and it would be likely that many employers would take disciplinary
action. This could result in losing your job and impact on future employment possibilities. This is in addition
to the potential of a serious incident occurring.
By always maintaining high standards and a professional attitude, lifeguards will ensure that customers feel
safe and they maintain a positive perception of you.
1.5.6 Dealing with Complaints

Do not assume that someone with a complaint is just being awkward; the vast majority of people who
complain are genuinely upset about something. Find out all the facts and resolve the problem where
possible or call on other members of the team to support you.
When dealing with a complaint, be open, sympathetic and follow the general points below:
• Listen carefully without interruption to ensure you get the full details
• Ask questions to get more detailed information
that might help you to reach a solution
• Be sympathetic but not patronising
• Recap the issue to show that you have listened
and understood the reason for the complaint
• Apologise without apportioning blame even if the
issue was not your fault
• Explain the action you are going to take, how
and when
• Where appropriate, check that any promised
action has been carried out
• Remember to always be polite, positive and
professional
The customer does not want to hear excuses; they just want the problem resolved. If the complaint occurs
whilst you are on poolside, ensure supervision is maintained by calling for back-up so you can look after
the customer’s needs and pool safety is not compromised.
A lifeguard will need to ensure that they are aware of the procedures for recording and reporting customer
complaints. Pool operators will have set out a procedure within the PSOP for dealing with the public. A
sample of the content and your role within the PSOP is detailed over.
19
Dealing with the Public
NOP Content What your employer will have set out What your role is
Dealing with the Your employer will have identified the When on duty, the management and
public. arrangements for communicating safety safety of the members of public using
messages to customers. your pool is your responsibility.
Here are some examples: • Understand and apply the rules of
• Rules of the facility your pool in accordance with your
• Safety signs training and the procedure set out
• Poolside rules including by your employer
Diving rules • Communicate with pool users to
Swimmer and non/weak swimmer ensure their safety:
areas
– Prevention through education
• Access control – Prevention through supervision
Communication with reception – Customer care
Opening and closing poolside – Controlling access
access – Preventing unauthorised access
Management of swimmers and
• Understand and follow the
children and those with disabilities
communication systems set out by
from the entrance into the swimming
your employer
pool environment from changing
rooms • Follow your training in these
procedures, paying particular
• Under 8 admission policy and control
attention to the use of specialist
measures
equipment for access
Adult to child supervision ratio for all
swimming sessions including parties
Action to take if you find a child
unsupervised
How to manage a situation where an
adult is exceeding the ratio in the pool
• Photographic policy including
Procedure if you see someone taking
pictures in the pool environment
Case study based on real life events

Here we can see an example of what can the Health and Safety at Work etc Act 1974 for
happen if lifeguards had the wrong approach failing in his duty to take reasonable care for the
to their job. health and safety of pool users.
A lifeguard who failed to notice a bather lifeless Speaking after the case, the HSE inspector said:
at the bottom of a swimming pool was convicted “It is completely unacceptable for those with a
at Crown Court. responsibility for the safety of others to neglect
The man had gone swimming as part of his their duty.
recovery from an injury. He got into difficulties, While the lifeguard did not cause the gentleman
but one of the lifeguards on duty was distracted to get into difficulty, his neglect of duty was
for a prolonged period. It was found that the clearly a major factor in leaving him and
lifeguard was talking and not supervising the potentially others using the pool unnecessarily
pool and failed to spot him lying at the bottom. exposed to risk.
The Health and Safety Executive (HSE) Standards are well established through training
prosecuted the lifeguard over the incident. He and they must be applied by lifeguards to ensure
was convicted of breaching Section 7 (a) of swimmers are safe.”
NPLQ Generation 9
The Pool Operator

1.6

The pool operator is your employer.
Once you have passed this qualification, the pool operator will arrange to introduce you to training in the
systems and procedures that are used at the facility where you will be working. This is called an induction.
You will be provided with a job description, a uniform, equipment, a contract of employment, a rota of work
and a training plan. The pool operator will also explain company structure, mission and goals. You’ll start to
understand about health and safety audits and Key performance Indicators (KPIs).
1.6.1 Induction Training

To receive a full understanding of the procedures set out at your place of work, your employer will provide
you with a full and thorough induction in the Pool Safety Operating Procedures (PSOP) at the start of your
employment and prior to you undertaking any lifeguard duties. Some further site specific training may be
provided in a structured format throughout your probationary period. Your employer has a legal obligation
to provide this initial training, which, delivered along with your NPLQ, will prepare you for the start of your
career as a professional lifeguard.
During your induction your employer should
evaluate your learning to ensure a suitable level
of competency is maintained. This competency
assessment may take a number of forms or use
a combination of methods which may include
questions and answers, observations, practice
drills and test papers.
It is essential that employers maintain
comprehensive records of all training delivered.
Lifeguards may be required to sign training records
confirming their attendance at induction, and
that the training was delivered and competency
evaluated. An example of common induction
training elements follows.
Essentially an induction covers:
• Basic Health and Safety information
• Employment information
• Staffing arrangements
• Normal Operating Plan (NOP)
• Emergency Action Plan (EAP)
• Facility Operations
Induction training is specific to the pool at which you work as

every pool is different, however much of the content will be
similar with common areas. This means that if you go to work
at another pool you will need to go through the induction
process again to ensure that you understand and are
competent in each facility’s systems and procedures.
As part of your induction you will normally undertake a number of poolside orientation sessions to ensure
you are fully familiar with the pool’s systems and procedures prior to working alone. When carrying
out orientation sessions, you must not distract lifeguards supervising the pool or talk unnecessarily on
poolside. The RLSS UK recommends that you do not wear lifeguard uniform whilst carrying out your
orientation sessions; instead wear an easily identifiable bib over the top of your uniform to make it clear that
you are being trained. It is also important not to be positioned directly next to a fellow lifeguard on poolside;
this to ensure there is no temptation to talk or distract each other and to also ensure swimmers do not see
lifeguards and staff next to each other on poolside.
During an induction, whilst completing an orientation session it is good practice to complete a Poolside
Orientation Sheet. This can be used as a debrief tool by your line manager to check and record your
competence, as well as giving you the opportunity to ask any questions relating to the pool and relevant
sections of the NOP.
21
Sample Poolside Orientation Sheet
Name:
Date: Time: Zone:
Session type - General, lane or inflatable session etc:
• Write down/draw alarm points in the zone
• What depths and gradients are in

the zone?
• What hazards are in zone?
• What was the maximum number

of pool users in zone during
supervision session?
• What was the highest number of:
Adults
Children
Infants
• Give example(s) where early
intervention can be used within the
zone.
• List pool rules specific to the zone
• Record any dangerous swimmer

activity
Record questions you may have relating to the zone, NOP and EAP:
Managers debrief notes and feedback given to lifeguard:
Competent to carry out poolside duties: YES / NO
NPLQ Generation 9
1.6.2 Ongoing Training and Competency Assessment
As with the induction training, your employer has a legal responsibility to ensure that lifeguards maintain

their knowledge, understanding and competency levels of lifeguard standards, together with the PSOP
at the facility at which they work. It is important to remain up to date and informed about any revision or
changes to the centre’s procedures. Ongoing Training and Competency Assessment is usually provided by
your employer who will determine the frequency.
RLSS UK have devised a plan for Operators to use, the plan covers elements of the NOP, EAP and NPLQ
on each session.
1.6.3 Individual Training and Competency Assessment Records

A full training and competency assessment record must be kept for every lifeguard. Many organisations
keep central records, but it is important that you keep your own records. It is your evidence when you
apply for a new post or for promotion, and it is an indication to a prospective employer that you are an
organised person. Your records should include your name, venue of training, the trainer’s name, how long
each session lasted, what topics were covered and competency.
1.7 Risk Assessment

Your employer will have completed a check called a Risk Assessment. There are many different types of
pools and designs and the outcome of the Risk Assessment will impact on the content of the centre’s written
procedures and your training and induction at each facility where you work. Risk Assessment will be outlined
in more detail later in this section.
23
1.8 Pool Safety Operating Procedures –

PSOP
The PSOP consists of two documents:
1. Normal Operating Procedures (NOP), outlining the safe day to day running of the building.
2. Emergency Action Plan (EAP), a detailed document outlining what to do in foreseeable emergencies.
Fully informed operators will put in place procedures that enable them to comply with their legal obligations
covered earlier, which ensure that both staff and users of the pool are kept safe from injury or ill health.
Whilst the contents of these procedures are varied and specific to the swimming pool for which they are
written, outlined throughout this section you will see common content of what your employer will have set
out and your role within the NOP.
As an example the NOP may include:

(a) Details of the pool(s) – dimensions and depths, features and equipment and a plan of the building.
The plan of the building may include positions of pool alarms, fire alarms, emergency exit routes and
any other relevant information.
(b) Potential risk – an appreciation of the main hazards within the pool and of users particularly at risk, is
required before safe operating procedures can be identified.
(c) Dealing with the public – arrangements for communicating safety messages to customers, customer
care, poolside rules for the public and for lifeguards, controlling access.
(d) Lifeguards’ duties and responsibilities and special supervision requirements for equipment, lifeguard
training; and numbers of lifeguards for particular activities.
(e) Systems of work – including lines of supervision, call-out procedures, work rotation and maximum
poolside working times.
(f) Operational systems – controlling access to a pool or pools intended to be out of use including the
safe use of pool covers.
(g) Detailed work instructions – including pool cleaning procedures, safe setting up and checking of
equipment, diving procedures and setting up the pool for galas.
(h) First aid supplies and training – including equipment required, its location, arrangements for
checking it, first aiders, first aid training and disposal of sharps.
(i) Details of alarm systems and any emergency equipment, maintenance arrangements – all alarm
systems and emergency equipment provided, including operation, location, action to be taken on
hearing the alarm, testing arrangements and maintenance.
(j) Conditions of hire to outside organisations.
An EAP may cover:
(a) Overcrowding
(b) Disorderly behaviour (including violence to staff)
(c) Lack of water clarity
(d) Outbreak of fire (or sounding of the alarm to evacuate the building)
(e) Bomb threat
(f) Lighting failure
(g) Structural failure
(h) Emission of toxic gases
(i) Serious injury to a bather
(j) Discovery of a casualty in the water
NPLQ Generation 9
Other policies and procedures

1.9

In addition to the PSOP, there are more procedures your employer will have in place which you will need to
be familiar with as a lifeguard. We have listed some examples below:
1.9.1 Safeguarding
Safeguarding is broader than ‘child or adult protection’ as it also includes prevention. Safeguarding can be
defined as:
• All organisations working with children, vulnerable adults, young people and their families, taking all
reasonable measures to ensure their well being and that the risks of harm to their welfare are minimised
• Where there are concerns about children, vulnerable adults and young people’s welfare, all
organisations take appropriate action to address those concerns, working to agreed local policies
and procedures in full partnership with other local organisations.
Safeguarding children and vulnerable adults is vital for organisations such as leisure centres, as your
employer, and you as an employee, have a duty of care towards the children and vulnerable adults with
whom you have contact. Having safeguards in place within an organisation not only protects and promotes
the welfare of children and vulnerable adults, but also it enhances the confidence of staff, volunteers,
parents/carers and the general public. A Safeguarding Policy will be in place at the site at which you work
and your employer will ensure you are fully trained in this policy through your induction.
1.9.2 Equality and Diversity

What is equality?
Equality is ensuring individuals or groups of individuals are treated fairly and equally. They should not be
treated less favourably but specifically to their needs, including areas of race, gender, disability, religion or
belief, sexual orientation and age.
Actively promoting equality should remove discrimination in all of the previously mentioned areas. Bullying,
harassment or victimization are also considered as equality and diversity issues.
What is diversity?
Diversity aims to recognise, respect and value people’s differences, variety and individuality. It further aims to
create an inclusive culture in which all colleagues and customers can contribute and develop their full potential.
How can lifeguards promote equality and diversity?

All work colleagues and customers deserve to receive an equitable service. Lifeguards can promote
equality and diversity by treating all work colleagues and customers fairly.
Although lifeguards will not be expected to understand the diverse needs of all work colleagues and
customers immediately, they will need to be prepared to engage fully, to listen to and support them.
It will be the role of the operator to ensure that information and training regarding this subject is provided
where appropriate.
How lifeguards can promote equality and diversity?
25
1.9.3 Post-traumatic Stress Disorder (PTSD)

Post-traumatic stress disorder (PTSD) is a psychological and physical condition that is caused by a very
frightening or distressing event such as an emergency in a swimming pool. It occurs in up to 30% of
people who experience or witness traumatic events.
Someone with PTSD often relives the traumatic event through nightmares and flashbacks. They may also
have problems concentrating and sleeping, and feel isolated and detached. These symptoms are often
persistent and severe enough to have a significant impact on a person’s day-to-day life.
PTSD can be successfully treated, even when it occurs many years after the traumatic event. Depending
on the severity of the symptoms, and how soon they develop after the traumatic event, a number of
different treatment strategies may be recommended.
Lifeguards should understand that it is quite normal to feel upset, anxious, depressed or stressed after an
incident or accident. Support will be provided for you through your employer.
1.9.4 Admission Policy for Children

Swimming pool operators should have
an admission policy for children which is
communicated with users. The admission
policy should be enforced by reception
staff and lifeguards as part of their role.
Managing Health and Safety in Swimming
Pools (HSG179) gives operators guidance
on how many children under the age of 8
a responsible person aged 16 or over can
supervise.
It is very important for lifeguards to
understand the policy for the centre that
work at to ensure they can enforce that
policy within the swimming pool.
Lifeguards may need to remind adults using the swimming pool of their responsibility to supervise the
children in their care.
1.9.5 Environmental Policy

Most operators will have an environmental policy that details the company’s commitment to preserving the
environment. The policy may include details of:
• Recycling methods within the centre for both customers and employees
• Lighting arrangements (employee to turn light off in areas not used/automatic lighting to
conserve energy)
• Pool temperatures policy (to maintain a suitable temperature and not waste energy)
• Water outlet arrangements (showers and taps with time/movement sensors or push activation)
• Pollution/waste discharge policy
It is important to understand the operators environmental policy and follow training provided.
NPLQ Generation 9
REvision : Section 1 Element 1

1. Name 5 attributes of a lifeguard:
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Within Health and Safety Law give 1 responsibility for:
i) A Lifeguard_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
ii) Your Employer___________________________________________________________________________________________________

3. What does the COSHH regulation relate to?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. What do the PPE regulations relate to?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Why is teamwork essential?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. Why should Lifeguards wear uniform?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. How would you deal with a customer complaint?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
27

8. Give 5 examples of poor or unprofessional lifeguard activity:
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
9. Why is ongoing training important?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
10. What is a PSOP?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
11. Give 4 headings you may find in a NOP?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
12. Give 4 headings you may find in an EAP?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
13. What is Post-traumatic stress disorder (PTSD)?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Further revision questions are available on our website www.rlss.org.uk.
NPLQ Generation 9
ELEMENT 2 – swimming pool,

hazards and control measures

What we will cover
In this Element we will cover the types of environment in which you may work and some
of the hazards associated with these environments.
2.0 Types of Swimming Pools

This is your place of work and this is where your presence makes a difference.
In this section we will cover the types of pools, users, activities, observation and supervision techniques,
communication, signage and problems to look out for.
There is no such thing as a typical swimming pool. They can be any shape or size, from the traditional
rectangular design to the very complex free-form leisure pool that might have flumes, wave making
equipment or other features. Whatever the type of swimming pool, it is your role to ensure that all pool
users are safe.
Pool operators will have set out a procedure within the NOP covering the details of the pool. A sample of the
content and your role within the NOP is detailed below.
29
ELEMENT 2 – Swimming pool hazards and control measures
2.1 Details of the Pool

Details of pool(s) At each pool that you work at, your • It is essential that you are familiar
employer will have identified and set a with the pool layout and design
plan of the pool(s). A detailed plan of the Understand the risks associated
pool(s) is an excellent induction tool and with the plan
enables you to quickly view the depths, Manage the pool users who may
features, location of equipment, alarms not be familiar with the pool layout
and exit routes. through scanning your zone
The following is an example of the detail thoroughly and intervening early
you might expect to see in the NOP: Follow the maintenance, testing
• Dimensions, gradients and depths of and cleaning schedules set out
each of the pools at your facility by your employer
• Features and equipment e.g.: When using poolside equipment,
you will need to know how to set
Rapids
up, take down, use and supervise
Water cannons
the equipment safely.
Waterslides and splash pool
Spa pool This will include:
Play equipment such as a pool • Logging of maintenance and
inflatable equipment checks
• Plan of the building, which might • Supervision of activities, numbers
include and positions of lifeguards
Position of pool alarms • Type of session
Position of fire alarms • Setup, take down and storage
Location of emergency exit and procedures including manual
routes handling requirements
• Other relevant information such as
For all types of equipment following
Location of poolside equipment
the information and guidance which is
Location of high chairs
provided through the manufacturers
Storage rooms
guidelines is essential.
Moveable floors
Lighting
Blinds and glazed wall areas
NPLQ Generation 9
Complete at the facility where you are doing the course
Draw a plan of the pool environment and mark on the:
• Dimensions, gradients and depths
• Features and equipment
31
2.1.1 The Design

The design of a pool affects the number of lifeguards needed and the way they carry out their duties. The
pool where you work will have identified any hazards, risks and lifeguard positions in your pool.
2.1.2 The Size of the Pool

Obviously the bigger the pool, the more people it can hold and the harder it will be to keep an eye on
all the activity of the pool users. It is therefore essential to have a proper plan that gives each lifeguard a
specific area of the pool to watch; this is called a zone. This prevents having several lifeguards watching
one part of the pool, while another area is ignored. Zones are covered later on in this section.
2.1.3 The Shape of the Pool, Gradients and Features

Traditional pools are rectangular but leisure centres and hotels often have different shapes – some have
tried to create a sub-tropical atmosphere using palm trees and other plants. It might look attractive but it
can be more challenging for lifeguards because there may be areas you cannot see from certain parts of
the poolside. Features such as walls, pillars, split-level pools and vegetation may also block your view.
The profile of the pool can vary too. Gentle slopes may be safer than sudden shelving which could be
found in some older pools. These could plunge unsuspecting swimmers into deep water.
During your induction you will be taught the hazards within each zone of the pool environment that you
lifeguard.
There are many types of pool including:
• Leisure pool
• Diving Pool
• Traditional/Competition Pool/Learner pool
• Olympic 50m/multipurpose pool
• Health club pool/small pool
• Outdoor pools and lidos
Some facilities may have a combination of pool design and features.
2.2 Leisure Pool

Leisure pool may include the following features:
• Wave pool
• Play equipment
• Water jets, fountains and
mushrooms
• Lazy river and river runs
• Flumes and slides
• Beach areas
NPLQ Generation 9
Leisure pools sometimes have a beach area leading into deeper water. Some pools have a wave machine
and many of these pools have the ability to alter the types of settings to vary the pattern, depth and force

of the waves.
Within this environment there can be water cannons, mushroom fountains, air geezers/jets and play
equipment. These features are sometimes on a timer and work on different patterns to provide variety.
Lazy rivers and river runs may lead off the leisure pool with some river runs going outside of the building.
Slides and flumes can vary from extremely fast for high excitement to slow slides that are more suitable for
younger children. These slides can also include the use of inflatable rings to sit on.
Leisure pools can prove to be some of the most challenging environments for lifeguards to supervise. Due
to the design and features within many leisure pools, the levels of supervision required may be increased
as hazards are potentially greater due to the nature of the environment.
2.3 Diving Pool

The design of diving boards can consist of platforms and spring boards. A typical swimming pool set-up
would be a 1 and 3 metre spring board with a 5 metre platform. Some specialist pools typically used for
competition may also have 1,3, 7.5 and 10 metre platforms.
Diving pools can be a stand alone pool but in some cases the diving area can be off the main swimming pool.
Some diving pools have moveable floors to allow the water depth to be changed. This gives more versatility
to the water area when the diving boards are not in use allowing the pool to be used for other activities.
33
2.4 Traditional/Competition Pool

Traditional pools can vary in length and
width. Older style pools may be 33.3
metres or yards long, however the more
common length is 25 metres with the
capacity for up to six or eight lanes for
swimming competitions and galas.
2.4.1 Olympic Pool

Olympic size pools are 50 metres
in length.
Some Olympic sized pools have booms
to allow for the pool to be separated into
sections and small pools.
2.4.2 Health Club Pool

Health Club Pool/Small Pool
Health club and hotel pools have gained in popularity over the years and are generally smaller and
shallower than your standard swimming pools.
There are many examples of different size pools in this category; however a typical health club or hotel pool
would be 15 metres long and 7 metres wide with a constant depth of around 1.2 metres.
It would be common to find a sauna, steam room and spa bath alongside the swimming pool.
NPLQ Generation 9
2.5 Outdoor Pools and Lidos

Outdoor pools are common place in many
health clubs, holiday camps and caravan
parks, and are in many cases a small
standard rectangular design.
Lidos are outdoor pools and can often be
extremely large with deep water. A lido could
be as long as 50 to 100 metres and as wide
as 25 metres.
2.5.1 Lifeguarding Outdoor Pools

When working in sunny or warm outside conditions, lifeguards should use protection:
• Shelter from sun (where possible)
• Use a sun umbrella to block out sun
• Use protective sun cream
• Project eyes by using polarised sunglasses (with 100% UV filters)
• Keep hydrated by drinking regularly
Be aware that windy conditions can cause and increase the risk of sunburn, and sunburn can still occur
even when the sky is overcast.
2.6 Risk Assessment

The purpose of a Risk Assessment is to look at a pool and identify all hazards that have the potential to
cause harm, and then identify different measures to reduce the likelihood (risk) of an accident happening.
• A hazard – something with the potential to cause harm
• A risk – how likely it is that harm will actually be caused
• A control measure – something that is put in place to prevent the hazard causing harm e.g wet
floor sign
Risk Assessment should cover:

• Premises and Utilities – e.g. the pool’s design, structure and features, power and water.
• Task and Activities – e.g. cleaning, setting up an inflatable
• People – e.g. pool users, their age, numbers and the way they behave
The pool operator will follow five simple steps:

• Step 1 – Identify the hazards
• Step 2 – Decide who might be harmed and how
• Step 3 – Evaluate the risks and decide on precautions
• Step 4 – Record your findings and implement them
• Step 5 – Review your assessment and update if necessary
35
2.6.1 Hazard Categories

At the pool where you are doing the course, walk around and identify some
hazards within each category below.
Premises and Utilities Task and Activities People
2.7 Sample Normal Operating Procedures

Pool operators will have set out a procedure within the NOP containing the potential risk factors, set-out
systems of work and some operational systems following the completion of a risk assessment. A sample of
the content and your role within the NOP is detailed below.
2.7.1 Potential Risk Factors
Your employer will have completed a Knowing the hazards you have the
detailed list of the hazards within each ability and knowledge to intervene
pool. early, by educating and supervising
pool users.
Potential Each pool will have identified its high risk You will need to know all of the risk
Risk Factors areas with control measures on how to areas for each pool that you work at.
including: reduce the risk of an accident or injury As mentioned in this section, the zone
Main hazards occurring. information card will identify each area
and control of the pool that you are responsible for
measures for as well as in the NOP. Pool orientation
each swimming sessions underpin your knowledge and
pool. assist you to learn this vital information.
Accident Many centres complete an accident You should know the most common
prevention. analysis to detail the cause and location accidents and where these are located
of accidents. This information is vital and within the swimming pool environment
will allow systems and procedures to be to enable you to be a far more
improved all the time. proactive lifeguard.
Inform your line manager if you feel
more can be done to prevent accidents
or injury to pool users.
NPLQ Generation 9
2.7.2 Systems of Work

Systems of Your employer will establish a set of Understand and apply the rules of your
work. work arrangements for both the safety pool in accordance with your training
of you, as their employee, and ultimately and the procedure set out by your
the users of the facility. Here are some employer.
examples:
These arrangements have been
• Lines of communication and
developed to protect you. It is essential
supervision
that you adhere to the systems set out.
• Work rotation
Shift pattern
• Poolside rotation
Static or high chair positions
• Maximum poolside work times
In one session
Per shift
Exceptional circumstances and
temporary measures
2.7.3 Operational Systems
Operational Your employer will have considered Understand and apply the rules of your
systems. operational systems such as controlling pool in accordance with your training
access to pools, how long you work on and the procedure set out by your
poolside and safe use of equipment. employer.
Here are some examples: These arrangements have been
• Control of access to pools developed to protect you. It is essential
Gates that you adhere to the systems set out.
Locks
Staff
• Safe use of pool covers
2.7.4 Opening and Closing Checks
Opening and Your employer will have a list of tasks that Understand your role in the opening
closing checks. must be completed before the swimming and closing checks.
pool can be opened and after the Following instruction and training given
swimming pool has closed. by your employer.
The tasks may well be safety critical, for Only sign to confirm you have complete
example: a check, if you have completed them.
Opening: Remember these could be safety
• Ensure lifeguard equipment is in place critical.
and in good condition
• Test pool alarms
Closing:
• Check all customers have left the pool
• Check fire exits are secure
37
2.8 Common features/hazards in all

pool environments
In each category identified we are now going to look at some common hazards within a swimming pool
and the actions you will take to minimise the risk.
2.8.1 Premises
Premises hazards are related to the building itself where the design and structure creates the risk of injury.
An example of this would be steep gradients or slippery floors. It is best for hazards to be designed out
prior to building; however this is not always possible or practicable.
Water depth
Swimming Pool Hazard Control Measure by a Lifeguard
Deep or shallow water Lifeguard intervention:

and pool slopes. Ensure weak and non-swimmers stay within their standing depth or
standing depth of supervising parent or adult.
Other measures:
Signs showing the depth of different areas of a pool should meet certain
standards and the main points to remember are:
• Provide warning signs about the depth
• Mark steep slopes on the floor
• Floating lines are sometimes used to mark the start of the slope
• Allow diving only when water is deep enough
Troughs, gutters and handrails
Misuse and entrapment. Lifeguard intervention:

Educate and intervene to stop weak or non-swimmers from using the
guttering to pull themselves out of their depth. Manage back to a safe
area/shallow water.
Report any damage and take immediate appropriate action to make the
area safe e.g. broken gutter tile.
Other measures:
Pre-opening pool safety check.
NPLQ Generation 9
Floor surfaces

Wet floor surfaces on pool Lifeguard intervention:

surrounds, in changing Educate and intervene where required to prevent swimmers running
rooms and other areas within the swimming pool environment.
represent a slip hazard.
Other measures:
Signage e.g No running signs.
Regular cleaning and degreasing of floor surfaces reduces slips and falls
by removing grease and body fat build up.
Glare and reflection
Glare caused by lighting Standing/sitting in the appropriate position as detailed in the PSOP.
or sunshine, or reflection Report to Supervisor/Manager if your ability to see swimmers on the
caused by surface or surface or below the water is affected by glare or reflection.
glazing.
Other measures:
Impacting on the
Lifeguards working in Lido or outdoor pools can wear polarised glasses
lifeguard’s ability to see
which may reduce the effect of glare and/or reflection.
swimmers and through
the water
(see supervision section).
39
Drain covers
Entrapment. Lifeguard intervention:

Pool outlets, drain covers Supervise and educate swimmers to stay away and not to play with or
and the outlets from some around pool grilles and grates.
water features have caused Other measures:
a number of very serious Signage e.g. hazard warning signs.
accidents due to the Specially designed covers that meet industry guidance to reduce the risk
suction, entrapment or hair of injury and entrapment.
being caught in the grate.
Inspection.

A Borough Council has been prosecuted to ensure that the sample outlet had two vents
by the Health and Safety Executive (HSE) so if one became blocked the other vent would
following an incident where a seven-year take the pressure off the suction. There were too
old girl was trapped by a water outlet at a few lifeguards on duty and of the two that were
Swimming Pool. working, one was cleaning and the other could
not see the whole pool due to the glare from
On 2 May 2009, a seven-year old girl was using sunlight reflecting on the water.
the swimming pool with her great grandfather at
the Leisure Centre. Her hair was sucked into the After the hearing, HSE Inspector said:
water sampling outlet on the side of the pool, “This incident was extremely traumatic for the
trapping her underwater for two minutes and young girl and her great grandfather and it
36 seconds. Her great grandfather had to pull could have had far more serious consequences.
a clump of hair from her head in order to free Managed properly, swimming pools are a place
her. She was unconscious when she was finally for fun and exercise yet the council put pool
taken out of the water, limp and blue in colour, users at risk of entrapment by not properly
but came round once laid on the poolside. maintaining the water outlets.”
HSE told the Magistrates’ Court today that the The Council pleaded guilty to breaching section
Council, which owns and runs the swimming 3(1) of the Health and Safety at Work etc. Act
pool, had not managed the risks to members of 1974 and was fined £18,000 and ordered to pay
the public using it. In particular the council failed costs of £7,500.
NPLQ Generation 9
2.8.2 Common Pool Side Equipment
There is various equipment that is used in or around swimming pools, this will vary from facility to facility.

Equipment should be supplied with manufactures guidance created by the company that has made the
equipment. This guidance will detail how the equipment should be used, stored, maintained, serviced etc.
Using the manufactures guidance the operator will need to create clear polices and procedures for each
piece of equipment. To include:
• Maintenance
• Cleaning
• Dismantling
• Storage
• Security
• Safety checks
Safety checks are very important and would ensure equipment is safe to be used by customers or
employees. Lifeguard should understand the importance of these checks and ensure they are completed
correctly, with hazards identified reported to a manager.
Poor equipment maintenance, servicing, cleaning, storage or checks could result in equipment failure and
major injury.
Lane ropes
Weak swimmers may use Lifeguard intervention:

them to hang onto and Educate and intervene to stop weak or non swimmers from using the
pull themselves out of lane ropes to pull themselves out of their depth.
their depth. Manage swimmers back to a safe area/shallow water.
Users sometimes sit on Educate and intervene to prevent swimmers from sitting on lane ropes.
them or pull them under
the water making the lines Educate and intervene to maintain safe direction rotation of swimmers
an underwater hazard. and speed and lane discipline.
Injury to swimmers in pool Other measures:
if lane ropes are set up or If swimmers are present lifeguards should remain in their normal
moved during pool use. supervision positions while additional staff set up lane ropes so
observation of swimmer safety is not compromised.
Swimmer collisions.
Pool operators will have a policy on how to manage swimmers using
Swimmers using MP3
waterproof music players, fins, hand paddles, and other equipment.
players.
Signage e.g directional and speed lane signage.
41
Starting blocks and backstroke flags
Starting blocks can fail or Starting blocks

move when used if not Lifeguard intervention:
fitted properly. Educate and intervene to
Risk of serious injury if ensure correct use.
starting block is used Intervene to prevent general
incorrectly or by untrained public use.
swimmers.
Other measures:
Swimmers jumping and
Signage e.g Starting block
grabbing backstroke flags
safety signage.
that hang over the pool.
Moving of backstroke Backstroke flags
flag poles are a manual Lifeguard intervention:
handling hazard as well Educate and intervene to prevent dangerous behaviour where swimmers
as the potential to hit staff may jump, grab flags and/or misuse equipment.
and public when being
moved.
Pool steps
Damaged steps. Lifeguard intervention:

Entrapment in or around Educate and intervene to discourage swimmers from gathering round the
steps. steps, swinging from the handrails or general misuse.
Watch pool users who rely on the steps to enter the water e.g. the elderly
or infirm, people with disabilities.
Other measures:
Isolate, take out of use and report any broken equipment.
NPLQ Generation 9
Disabled hoist

Swimmers struggling with Lifeguard intervention:

the steps as not using or Offer or set up hoist if required/
requesting hoist or aware requested by swimmers.
of its availability.
Other measures:
Incorrect use of Inspection, routine maintenance
equipment. and certification checks.
Poor equipment
maintenance/equipment
failure.
2.8.3 Common Pool Features
Looking at the leisure pool E-Environment write down as many feature hazards
that you can see:
43
Moveable floors
Unfamiliar and variable Lifeguard intervention:

water depths. Follow manufacturer’s guidance to ensure swimmers are out of water or
Diving or jumping into away from floor when floor depths are changed.
shallow water. Other measures:
Depth signage changes automatically.
Access to the control panel restricted.
Emergency stop/override button.
Booms
Entrapment under boom. Lifeguard intervention:

Blind spot(s) caused by Follow manufacturer’s guidance to ensure swimmers are out of water or
boom. away from boom when being moved, raised or lowered.
Injury caused by unstable Prevent unauthorised access to platform.

platform. Other measures:
Access to the control panel restricted.
Emergency stop/override button.
NPLQ Generation 9
Waves

Disorientation, particularly Lifeguard intervention:

in weaker swimmers. Ensure weak and non swimmers stay within their ability.
Force of the waves can Be aware of and intervene when swimmers are getting tired or are
knock swimmers off beginning to struggle against the force of the water.
balance. Enforce no jumping/diving due to the changes in water depth.
Reduced visibility caused Understand the changes in depth and different wave patterns and how
by turbulence and this can impact on swimmers and if you have to enter the water to
swimmer density. rescue.
Influx of swimmers when Awareness of pool capacity and notify Supervisor/Manager to increase
waves are activated. lifeguards levels as per NOP.
Changes in water depth. Educate and intervene to keep swimmers away from wave chamber
Wave chamber outlets. outlets.
Other measures:
Swimming pool rules.
Wave programme with appropriate duration.
Band control system for pool users during busy periods.
Increase lifeguard numbers.
Audible warning with signs.
Signage e.g Wave pool signage.
45
Flumes and slides

These can range from:
• Very short individual child slides
• Slides from inflatable structures
• Large flumes of varying size, type, length and speed
Enclosed
Open
Drop
Inflatable ring/Mat
Weak or non-swimmers Lifeguard intervention:

disorientated. Educate and intervene to ensure flume rules are followed by all swimmers:
Swimmer collision in flume Lifeguards to communicate and instruct swimmers to:
or at flume exit. • Queue safely
Overcrowding. • Ride the flume as per rules
Steps and queuing. • Remove dangerous jewellery
Damaged flume. • Begin ride when safe to do so to avoid collisions
• Vacate flume exit immediately to avoid collision
Entry into flume.
High air temperature and Other measures:
humidity at top of flume Height or age limits.
impacting on lifeguard. Traffic lights and sensors.
Signage.
NPLQ Generation 9
River rides, rapids and similar features
Moving water features such as ‘lazy rivers’

and flowing water that circulates through
canal-like channels are found in some
leisure centres.
Sometimes inflatables or floating mats are
provided for pool users to ride along the
river which require close supervision.
The design and location in the facility can
make a real difference to the ability of
lifeguards to maintain constant observation,
especially if the feature leads out of the
building to return at another point.
• Speed and motion of Lifeguard intervention:

water Close supervision of the entry point is required to ensure that weak and
• Changes of depth non-swimmers do not enter the feature.
• Turbulence and water Look out for individuals who stop in the features as this can cause
clarity collisions and swimmers need to be encouraged to keep moving.
• Strong current If the feature exit is into deep water, lifeguards need to pay particular
particularly at entrance attention to weak and non-swimmers finding themselves out of their
• Collision depth.
• Lifeguard access to
As always, know the hazards and be prepared to give specific advice
pool
and instructions where necessary. Do not allow jumping or diving into the
It is rare that young flow and remain alert when supervising flowing water.
children can stand up and Remove inflatables or mat from the water when not in use.
all swimmers could lose
their footing. Other measures:
Signage.
Smaller children and, in
cases where water flow Age, height and/or swim ability restrictions.
is high, even adults may Emergency stop/override button.
find it difficult to leave the
feature.
Many of these features
lead outside of the
building and return at
another point. This can
decrease visibility due to
blind spots and glare.
Weak and non-swimmers
falling through inflatable or
mat.
Inflatables or mats can
gather to create blind
spots.
47
Diving boards and platforms

Diving areas must be carefully supervised
as the consequences of an accident can
be extremely serious. All diving must be
controlled in line with the procedures set
out in the NOP.
Diving stages are sometimes positioned
over an un-segregated area of the pool,
so close supervision is needed to prevent
other pool users swimming into the diving
area.
A pool facility providing diving boards
means having lifeguards dedicated to
supervising the boards and landing area, as
this now becomes a zone in its own right.
Collisions due to Lifeguard intervention:

swimmers not clearing the Educate and intervene to ensure diving boards/platform rules are
area quickly. followed by all swimmers.
Multiple bouncing and Lifeguards to communicate and instruct swimmers to:
dangerous acrobatics on a • Queue safely
springboard. • Use the boards/platforms as per rules
Damaged equipment. • No multiple bouncing
Weak swimmers diving • No running from the back of the board/platform
into deep water. • Use the boards when safe to do so to avoid collisions
Striking the side of the • Vacate the area swiftly and appropriately to avoid collision
pool. (example below)
Swimmers falling down

the stairs or falling through
the railings.
Swimmers striking the
board through poorly
executed dive.
Running dives from diving
boards.
Do not allow divers waiting their turn to sit on the guard rails of steps or
diving platforms.
Do not allow crowding on platforms or steps.
Other measures:
• Height, age limits and/or swimming ability
• Signage e.g. principles of safe diving
• Access control to the diving area
• Inspect diving boards and platforms prior to use
NPLQ Generation 9
2.8.4 Supervision of People Hazards – The Swimmer
Higher risk swimmers

Some categories of swimmer do present a higher than normal risk, both to themselves and to others in the
water. Watch out for higher risk groups that include:
• Weak or vulnerable swimmers
• Show-offs or particularly boisterous or rowdy swimmers
• Swimmers wearing armbands or other buoyancy aids
• Children not accompanied by an adult
Being constantly alert for danger and being proactive (intervening early) may prevent a serious accident.
Doing your job well will, in many cases, prevent something going wrong.
Weak or vulnerable swimmers

Dangerous incidents can develop if weak swimmers suddenly find themselves out of their depth and begin
to panic. Look out for weak swimmers and educate them to the depths of the pool if it looks as if they are
entering deep water. This kind of simple intervention can easily prevent incidents from occurring and the
need for you to carry out a rescue.
The vulnerable include:
• Swimmers under the influence of alcohol or drugs
• Swimmers with disabilities or those in poor health
• The elderly and the very young
• Swimmers who appear very nervous or timid
Medication
Lifeguards are strongly discouraged from ‘looking after’ medication given to them by swimmers. In the
event that it is required and the lifeguard is not available (or worse, has mislaid it), the legal and medical
consequences can be extremely serious.
Swimmers under the influence

If swimmers appear to be drunk, or under the influence of drugs or other medication, it would be
dangerous for them to enter the water.
Identifying the swimmer who is intoxicated through alcohol or drugs is extremely difficult, however if you
have concerns ensure swimmers who are under the influence do not swim.
Support from the lifeguard team and line manager should be sought in line with the centre’s written
procedures.
49

A coroner has called for tighter swimming The jury was told the group had been told off by
pool regulations after a boy aged eight pool-side staff for going down a slide in a group,
drowned in North Yorkshire. being rowdy and splashing about.
An inquest jury returned a verdict of death by Staff also asked them if they had been drinking
misadventure after hearing some of the group and smelt their breath.
he was with had been drinking. At the inquest one of the teenagers admitted
The Coroner said he wanted those suspected of they had had a glass of wine before going to
drinking to be barred from using swimming pools. the pool.
The inquest heard the boy had gone swimming The court was told that the boy had become
with three teenagers, his twin sister and an separated from the group and was found lying at
11-year-old friend as his mother was afraid the bottom of the pool by one of the teenagers.
of water.
Young children
As you will see in the intervention and rescue section later, children are a particularly high risk in the
swimming pool environment representing some of the highest rescue figures and drowning statistics.
‘Managing Health and Safety in Swimming Pools’ informs operators that they should consider the number
of young children (under the age of 8 years) allowed into the pool under the supervision of a responsible
person aged 16 or over.
Each pool will complete a risk assessment and decide on the supervision ratio for children under the age of 8.
The pool should have an admission policy that is enforced by receptionist, lifeguards and other staff.
As part of your induction you will be trained in the site-specific admissions policy where you work. This also
forms part of the NOP.
Unsupervised children
Parents often leave small children playing
unsupervised, believing the lifeguard is
responsible and the child is reasonably
competent and confident. Parents also
sometimes leave older children to supervise
younger brothers and sisters, and the older
children frequently forget their responsibilities as
they enjoy their own activities.
It is important to remember that even if a young
child maybe able to swim, this does not mean
they are able to respond appropriately in an
emergency, identify dangerous situations or
know when to ask for help. Just because a child
can swim does not mean they do not need to be
supervised.
NPLQ Generation 9

Unsupervised children Lifeguard intervention:
under eight years old. Act immediately where a child under eight is not supervised.
Speak with the child to find out who they are with and rejoin them with
their parent or guardian.
Use your team and line manager to support if you are not able to identify
who is responsible for the child.
Other measures:
Admission policy within the pool timetable.
Signage displaying policy.
Reception teams play an important role when selling tickets by checking
that adequate supervision is in place.

A caravan park company has been fined verdict of failing to ensure the little boy was not
£150,000 after a seven-year-old boy exposed to risks to his health and safety.
suffered brain injuries in a swimming pool At the time of the incident, four lifeguards were
not properly manned by lifeguards. on duty but not one was sat in the high chair
overseeing the pool area.
The case demonstrates the importance The Judge in the case said: “The boy suffered
of having proper procedures in place for catastrophic brain damage. The company
safeguarding the health and safety of visitors, breached its own safety policy by failing to
particularly children, at swimming pools. have sufficient lifeguards on duty. Nobody was
The company was found guilty by majority supervising the deep end of the pool at that time.”
2.8.5 Tasks and Activity Hazards

Tasks
Any task could present a hazard and normal day-to-day tasks could be more hazardous due to the
swimming pool environment e.g. due to wet flooring.
Examples of common tasks that lifeguards carry out within a swimming pool environment:
• Gala set up (including, starting blocks, lane ropes, flags)
• Inflatable set up
• Pool hoist use
• Cleaning
There should be a safe system of work for each task and lifeguards would be trained by the pool operator
in site specific equipment for each specific task.
51
Gala set-up
Injury to lifeguard or Lifeguard intervention:

swimmers during set-up Follow written procedures and safe systems of work for set-up of
of: equipment.
• Starting blocks Take care when moving trolleys or holders to avoid damage to the
• Lane ropes equipment and pool surround, injury to staff or swimmers and to ensure
• Lane flags the trolley does not fall into the pool.
Starting blocks can fail or It is safe practice to set-up/move lane ropes when swimmers are not in
move when used if not the water.
fitted properly. If swimmers are present, lifeguards should remain in their normal
Risk of serious injury if supervision positions while additional staff set-up lane ropes so
starting block is used observation of swimmer safety is not compromised.
incorrectly or by untrained Safety check of blocks prior to use.
swimmers.
Other measures:
Swimmers jumping and
Inspection repair and fault reporting procedure.
grabbing backstroke flags
that hang over the pool.
Moving of backstroke
flag poles are a manual
handling hazard as well
as the potential to hit staff
and public when being
moved.
Setting up the inflatable
Poor equipment Lifeguard intervention:

maintenance/equipment Ensure training and safe systems of work are followed e.g. correct lifting,
failure. use of trolley and set-up procedure with relevant number of trained staff.
Manual handling. Other measures:
Injury to lifeguard or Training and safe systems of work for all staff authorised to use inflatable.
swimmers. Correct use of anchor points to reduce trips and falls.
Correct distance away from poolside when set up to avoid hitting side of
pool.
Use of electric pumps only used with correct voltage, circuit breakers.
Safety signage.
Inspection and certification checks.
NPLQ Generation 9
Disabled hoist

Poor equipment Lifeguard intervention:

maintenance/equipment Ensure training and safe systems of work are followed e.g. correct lifting
failure. and set up procedure with relevant number of trained staff.
Manual handling. Other measures:
Injury to lifeguard or Training and safe systems of work for all staff authorised to use the hoist.
swimmers. Inspection and certification checks.
Cleaning
It is important as a lifeguard you understand how to clean and what equipment to use. There should be a
cleaning schedule to follow and record when cleaning has taken place.
Your employer will provide you with the training required to complete cleaning tasks.
Some general cleaning tasks may include:
• cleaning changing rooms
• cleaning toilets
• cleaning poolside
• cleaning windows
Incorrect or dangerous Lifeguard intervention:

chemicals used. Cleaning signage and closure of areas where possible during cleaning
Chemical spills. with chemicals.
Chemical inhalation. Personal Protective Equipment used as per training.
Chemical injury or burn. Never mix chemicals.
Mixture of chemicals/toxic Only use chemicals you are authorised and trained to use.
gas emission. Other measures:
Safe systems of work.
Employer risk assesses use of chemicals under COSHH as per current
legislation and only uses hazardous chemicals where necessary.
Pool operators will have set out a procedure within the NOP with detailed
work instructions. A sample of the content and your role within the NOP
is detailed over the page.
53
2.9 Detailed Work Instructions
Detailed work In addition to the safe systems of work It is essential that you follow the
instructions arrangements, your employer will also systems and procedures set out
detail instructions for the work you by your employer. Again, these
undertake. For example: arrangements have been developed to
• Pool-cleaning procedures: protect you and the users of the pool.
Daily Here is an example of how you might
Weekly comply with a detailed work instruction
Monthly for the use of a water slide:
• Opening and closing checklist • Complete pre-opening and closing
• Safe setting up and checking of inspection and checks
equipment: • Maintain the set staffing levels and
Pool hoist roles including specific supervision
Inflatables requirements for the flume:
Play and fun equipment Systems of control
• Diving procedures Traffic light system
Diving boards Manual system
• Setting up pool for galas: CCTV
Lane ropes Flume exit and management
Starting blocks • Control methods of entry and exit
Timing system and boards • Communicate effectively and ensure
• Moveable floors users are aware of and follow the
• Spas information contained in the signs
• Paddling pools and rules of:
• Regular maintenance Single or double riding
• Pool water treatment Riding position
Inflatable rides
• Apply your training when dealing

with incidents and accidents
• Complete maintenance and logging/
• records in accordance with the
procedures set out
NPLQ Generation 9
Activity Hazard

2.10

These arise because of the way some people use the pool. What is taking place is not necessarily wrong,
but it might increase the risk of an accident, so the activity needs to be well managed. Most of the time, all
that is needed to resolve the difficulty is a little tact and diplomacy and a clear explanation of the problem.
We are going to cover some common activity hazards that lifeguards may encounter in many swimming
pool environments (this is not an exhaustive list and different hazards may occur in different environments).
The self-appointed teacher
Activity Hazard Control Measures by a Lifeguard
Adults ‘teaching’ Educate self-appointed teachers if they are carrying out a dangerous
youngsters new skills activity e.g. teaching someone to dive in shallow water.
should be carefully
controlled, particularly
when diving or when the
activity is in deep water.
Hyperventilating then swimming underwater

Hyperventilation is excessive breathing often as a result of a panic attack. It does however occur in
swimming pools either when a swimmer is planning to swim a distance underwater (see first aid section).
Hyperventilation can cause swimmers to pass out and is considered to be a cause of some serious
incidents and drowning. (Shallow Water Blackout)
Swimming Pool Hazard Control Measures by a Lifeguard
Hyperventilating prior to Lifeguard intervention:

swimming under water. Discourage distance swimming underwater and warn pool users about
the dangers associated with hyperventilation.
The same caution also applies to people who repeatedly dive to the
bottom of the pool to retrieve objects as part of a game or contest.
If you see a swimmer taking
rapid breaths prior to swimming
under water, stop them and
explain the dangers. If they go
underwater before you are able
to intervene then watch/track
the swimmer throughout your
scan to ensure they do not
get into difficulty and speak to
them as soon as they surface.
55
Ducking and pushing

Ducking and pushing are potentially dangerous practices and are usually very upsetting to the swimmer
who is being ducked or pushed into the pool.
Ducking e.g pushing Lifeguard intervention:

swimmer underwater. It should be stopped immediately with swimmers educated to the
Pushing e.g pushing potential risks.
swimmers into pool.
Play fighting, fighting and bullying

Fighting or bullying are dangerous in or near a swimming pool and can result in injury to those directly
involved, and even to others who may be caught up in the activity. Bullying is invariably very difficult to
spot. However any form of fighting, play, or otherwise, should be stopped.
Fighting. Lifeguard intervention:

Play fighting. Intervene and stop immediately any fighting or bullying.
Bullying. Other measures:

Team members, Supervisor or Manager should be called for extra
support if required.
Running on poolside
Accidents caused by running are common in leisure centres, especially around the swimming pool and
changing rooms, and particularly as floors are wet and slippery. Sometimes the consequences are serious.
Running . Lifeguard intervention:

Intervene and stop swimmers running and explain the dangers.
When a child is running, ask them to slow down and then stop. If you
ask a child to stop abruptly, this can also cause them to slip.
Other measures:
Signage
NPLQ Generation 9
Gymnastics and acrobatics
Performing ‘gymnastic’ moves in the water regularly involves swimmers standing on someone’s shoulders

or using other swimmers as a platform for diving or jumping.
Gymnastics and Lifeguard intervention:

acrobatics. Intervene and stop swimmers
Collision with: attempting gymnastics and
• Other swimmers acrobatics and explain the
dangers.
• Pool floor
• Pool sides Other measures:
• Equipment (lane ropes Signage
etc)
Examples:
• Shoulder lifts
• Somersaults from water
• Back flips from side
• Front flips from side
Boisterous games
Games that involve thrashing about or fast swimming with sudden unpredictable changes of direction.
Swimmers may find it hard to get out of the way and all too often, collisions are inevitable.
Boisterous games. Lifeguard intervention:

Examples: Intervene and stop boisterous and dangerous activities, and explain the
• Ball games dangers.
• Tag
• Chase
• Racing in busy sessions
Bombing
This is where swimmers jump from the poolside or from a diving board with their knees clutched to their
chest. Once airborne, they have virtually no control. It is not only a nuisance but it also distracts lifeguards
and is a danger to other pool users they fall near or onto.
Bombing Lifeguard intervention:

Intervene and stop swimmers
bombing into the pool and
explain the dangers.
It is sometimes possible to
pre-empt an individual who may
be about to enter the water
dangerously. Look out for these
signs and you may be able to
intervene prior to them bombing.
57
Diving and jumping in swimming pool

Diving in a programmed session is generally a lower risk activity if supervised properly. Diving that is not
managed or carried out safely can be very dangerous and could result in serious head and spinal injuries.
Hazards
(i) Running dives from the poolside
Running and diving can be dangerous. It can injure the divers and other pool users. It is hard to maintain
control during a running dive and hard for the divers to stop themselves once they have started running.
Running dives often result in the divers hitting the pool floor and in some cases, injuring themselves
seriously. Even if this activity takes place in the diving area, running dives can carry the divers beyond the
deep water so they actually enter shallower water.
(ii) Diving sideways
Diving sideways or at an angle is dangerous because through a lack of control swimmers may strike the
poolside, the bottom of the pool or other swimmers.
(iii) Diving when the pool is crowded
A crowded pool means it is unlikely that the landing area will stay clear for long. You may hit other
swimmers. The risk is significantly reduced when there is a pool just for those using the diving board.
(iv) Specific types of dive
Backward dives/somersault entries - can cause accidents as the landing area cannot be seen and
divers may collide with other swimmers.
Dives without hands in front of head - can cause divers to strike their heads on the pool bottom.
• Running dives Lifeguard intervention:

• Diving sideways Enforce ‘No diving’ into water less than 1.5m deep.
• Diving when pool is Enforce swimming restrictions in diving area.
crowded
Enforce ‘No diving’ whilst wave machine is on.
• Backwards dives
• Somersault entries Prevent any dangerous diving.
• Dives without hands in Other measures:
front of head Safe diving information signage.
NPLQ Generation 9
Supervision of Specialist Activities

2.11
and Equipment

We are going to consider how special activities and features should be supervised and by the end, you will
know how you can make a large range of pool activities safer for users.
In particular, we will look at:
• Fins (flippers) snorkels and masks
• Rubber rings and other buoyancy aids
• Inflatables, mats and other floating equipment
• Sub Aqua sessions
• Canoeing
• Swimming lessons and club swimming
• Lane swimming
• Water Polo
Fins (flippers) snorkels and masks
Specialist Activities
Control Measures by a Lifeguard
and Equipment Hazard
Can injure other swimmers Lifeguard intervention:
if contact is made. Intervene and stop use of fins, snorkel and masks during general
Present particular un-programmed sessions.
hazards to the untrained Other measures:
as snorkels can cause Risk of injury is significantly reduced if used in a programmed session.
swimmers to inhale water
accidentally. Observe the pool rules for use as set in the pool’s NOP.
Masks should only be
permitted if CE marked
and only during properly
structured sessions.
Rubber rings and other buoyancy aids

Misuse (used as a toy Lifeguard intervention:
rather than a buoyancy Intervene and stop inappropriate use with rubber rings or buoyancy aids.
did). Ensure weak swimmers are adequately supervised and in an appropriate
Diving through rubber area of the pool.
rings could lead to injuries. Make sure weak swimmers do not use lane ropes, gutters or troughs to
Failure of equipment. pull themselves into deep water.
Other measures:
Signage with regard to weak swimmer areas and depth of the pool.
59
Inflatables, mats and other floating equipment

These devices need direct supervision. Increased lifeguard numbers are required depending on the size
and design of the equipment. The NOP should set out how and where inflatables, mats and similar floating
items are used.
Diving, jumping from Lifeguard Intervention:
equipment. Lifeguards to communicate and instruct swimmers to:
Falling off equipment onto • Queue safely
others swimmers. • Use the equipment as per rules
• Communicate to swimmers to remove dangerous jewellery
Jumping onto equipment
from the poolside. • Prevent swimmers from jumping or diving from the equipment, or from
one item to another
Entrapment under • No running on the equipment
equipment.
• Climb onto the equipment when safe to do so to avoid collisions
Being caught by the • Vacate the area where swimmers exit swiftly and appropriately to avoid
anchor lines. collision with swimmers or anchor lines
Blind spots caused by • Control use to prevent overcrowding on equipment
equipment.
Other measures:
Overcrowding. The manufacturer’s guidance will help pool operators with their risk
Heightened levels of assessment to determine the number of lifeguards required, set up,
excitement. maintenance and inspection equipment as well as equipment safety
Equipment failure. guidelines.
Young and weak Inflatables should be positioned away from pool edges, in deep water
swimmers floating out of and properly tethered, usually to the poolside or pool floor.
depth. Pool operator to determine lifeguard numbers and positions to ensure
the area under the inflatable can be seen by the lifeguards.
Inspect equipment prior to use.
Height, age limits and/or swimming ability.
NPLQ Generation 9
Sub Aqua sessions
Sub Aqua is a specialised session where

swimmers using breathing apparatus remain
underwater in the swimming pool.
The equipment used is specialised and sessions
are delivered and managed by qualified Sub Aqua
Instructors. Session can be potentially hazardous
and those involved required specialist training.
Pressurised containers. Lifeguard Intervention:
Large heavy equipment. Check session does not start until qualified instructor is present.
Difficulty in recognising an Ensure general public have left swimming pool before session
underwater emergency. commences.
Specialist training needed Other measures:

for removing equipment Enforce rules as detailed in NOP.
from swimmer and Where sub aqua activities are taking place, the NOP and EAP must
extracting from water. reflect the specific operating practices and any difficulties likely to arise
during a session.
Canoeing
Swimming pools are sometimes used for canoe training, particularly where beginners are being introduced
to the sport or during winter months. This calls for extra vigilance and special skills from lifeguards.
The activities of canoeists range from basic instruction to more advanced training and canoe sports.
Water contamination Lifeguard Intervention:
through dirty equipment Check session does not start until qualified instructor is present.
used in open water. Ensure general public have left swimming pool before session
Difficulty dealing with a commences.
canoeist that has capsized Supervise these activities in line with NOP and guidance from Governing
or is in difficulty. Body (British Canoe Union or Irish Canoe Union where appropriate).
Capsize in shallow water,
Other measures:
risk of contact with the
Ensure clean pool canoes are used for sessions.
pool floor.
Check equipment prior to session.
Collisions.
Suitable head protection to be worn by canoeists where identified in the
Damage to pool caused
risk assessment and specified in the NOP.
by canoes through
sudden hard contact. To reduce the likelihood of damage, dense protective foam padding is
sometimes fitted to canoes. In the event of damage being caused, report
it immediately to your supervisor.
61
Swimming lessons and club swimming

The NOP must set out the requirements for the supervision of teaching, coaching, the ratio between
participants, and the number of coaches and teachers. These sessions are referred to as ‘Programmed
Swimming’ due to the session being formally structured with discipline, supervision and continual
monitoring.
General swim or play sessions are not programmed sessions, therefore when used in teaching or coaching
sessions supervision should be provided by a lifeguard(s) (for example a play session at the start or end of
a lesson/session).
Where supervision is provided for programmed activities only, the NOP should specify the qualifications
to be held by the teacher or coach. RLSS UK recommends the National Rescue Award for Swimming
Teachers and Coaches.
In some cases lifeguards provide cover by
lifeguarding directly on poolside during swimming
lessons where the risk assessment has identified
the need.
It is important that the NOP clearly specifies lines
of responsibility especially where the pool is split
between programmed and un-programmed
activities.
As swimming instructors are supervising their class
directly, many NOP’s detail that the swimming teacher
when identifying an incident or emergency should call
or alert the lifeguard(s) for back up as the lifeguard
may have an overview of several classes or lessons.
Swimmer ability. Lifeguard intervention:
Weak and non-swimmers. Ensure swimmers do not enter water until swimming teacher/instructor
has arrived.
Nervous swimmers.
Work with swimming teacher/instructor.
Management of multiple
classes and swimmers. Teacher supervision:
The ratio between teachers and pupils in the water will vary depending
on the activity and the pool. They would have been set by the pool
operator following a risk assessment and industry guidance.
Other measures:
Drop off and collection point for parents and teachers to exchange
responsibility of pupil.
Factors that need to be considered include:
• The suitability of pool design
• The water temperature, clarity and depth
• The organisation of the pool for lessons
• Staffing requirements
• The number and ability of pupils
NPLQ Generation 9
Lane swimming sessions
Discreet but positive control of swimmers is essential for safety, and signs giving clear instructions for the

direction of swimming will help supervision. The NOP should clearly set out the lifeguard requirements and
the way in which lane swimming should be conducted.
Interference with or Lifeguard intervention:
misuse of lane lines by Supervise lane swimming
swimmers. and intervene if swimmers
Fast swimmers catching are not swimming in the
slower swimmers (nose to correct direction.
tail swimming). Educating swimmers not to
Swimmers colliding with stop or congregate at the
others moving in the ends of the pool will also
opposite direction. improve the experience
of the lane swimmer and
Crowding at the ends of reduce the likelihood of
the lane preventing others swimmers colliding at the
from turning. end of the pool.
Swimmers in lanes Good lane management by lifeguards can prevent arguments and
stopping to talk. unnecessary frustration between swimmers. It is not uncommon for ‘lane
Children or weak rage’ between swimmers where lifeguards have not followed basic lane
swimmers in inappropriate management principles. Intervene early if someone is swimming too fast
lanes. or slow in a lane.
Swimmers crossing lanes. Other measures:
Swimmers hyperventilating Lane swimming sessions should be marked clearly with directional signs
then trying to swim the to reduce the risk of swimmers colliding, so swimmers in neighbouring
under water. lanes swim in the same direction to reduce the potential for collision.
Fast, medium and slow lanes improve swimmer safety and enjoyment,
but this needs to be managed carefully and tactfully by lifeguards to
ensure swimmers are in the most appropriate lanes.
Water Polo
Water polo is a high endurance, contact sport played in a swimming pool. This sport requires deep water, as
players are not allowed to touch the bottom of the pool while playing.
Particular hazards that Where water polo is allowed to take place, your NOP and EAP must give
relate to the nature of the clear operating procedures that must be followed during a session. The
sport include: NOP will also outline lifeguard supervision requirements.
• Underwater swimming A suitably qualified and competent person should manage the session.
and hyperventilation
• Injuries from over- Other measures:
aggressive play Follow safe systems of work for setting up equipment.
• Players being pulled
underwater
• Churning water making
it difficult for the
lifeguard to see through
the water
Setting up and take down
of equipment.
63
Complete the hazards and control measures for each of the following tasks:
Set up for swimming lessons
Task Hazard Control Measures by a Lifeguard
Cleaning the changing rooms and poolside windows
Taking down the inflatable
Checking flume prior to opening
NPLQ Generation 9

1. What information would be found in the NOP section - Details of the Pool?
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. What features might a leisure pool contain?
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Why can leisure pools be some of the most challenging environments for lifeguards to supervise?
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. Risk assessment - what is:
i) A hazard?_________________________________________________________________________________________________________
ii) Risk?_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. What control measure can be used to prevent a non-swimmer entering deep water?
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. What control measure can be used to prevent slipping on wet floors?
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. What hazard is related to drain covers and outlet grills within a swimming pool?
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
8. Give 3 hazards relating to wave features:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
9. What instructions may Lifeguards give to customers when supervising a flume?
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
10. Give some examples of higher risk swimmers:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
11. ‘Managing Health and Safety in Swimming Pools’ recommends that

children under a certain age should be supervised, what is the age?
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
12. Give 5 Task and Activity hazards that may occur in a swimming pool:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
13. What should a Lifeguard do if customers are fighting in the swimming pool?
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
65
ELEMENT 3 – swimming pool supervision
What we will cover
This section covers all the techniques, common practices and skills required to supervise common
swimming pool environments in a safe manner. In a sense this is what ‘lifeguarding’ is and you will
need to apply the skills and information learnt prior to this point in the manual.
We are going to cover how to observe, supervise and

ensure a safe environment is maintained across a
selection of pool environments to include:
• Maintaining supervision
• 10:20 scanning system
• Programmed and unprogrammed swimming
sessions
• Lifeguard zones
• Scanning
• Maintaining concentration
• Lifeguard numbers and positions
• Visibility
• Maximum user loads
• Lifeguard rotation
• Technology
• Lifeguard duties and responsibilities
• Communication and alarms
3.0 Maintaining supervision on poolside

through supervision, observation and
intervention
Supervision means directing the activity to take more control of the way a pool user behaves.
Observation means watching the activities without taking any direct action.
A lifeguard needs to be able to balance the element of supervision required without having so much control
that people don’t enjoy their visit to the pool.
3.1 Early Intervention and Accident

Prevention
There are many ways the lifeguard can prevent accidents; by either reporting potential hazards to their
employer or through supervising pool users and intervening as early as possible to prevent a dangerous
activity or accident from occurring.
Early intervention is always better than having to rescue or give first aid. Although it is clear that some
accidents cannot be prevented, if there is a need to rescue and give first aid this could mean that the
normal measures may have failed.
Examples of early intervention:
• Asking a swimmer not to hyperventilate prior to swimming underwater
• Asking a swimmer to follow the direction of the lane swimming signs
• Stopping a weak swimmer from moving to the deep end by crawling along a lane rope or the side of
the pool
• Taking immediate action if you see a member of the public with a concerned expression on their face
– find out why and act accordingly
NPLQ Generation 9
Generally, lifeguards can prevent accidents by:
• Following and applying the site Pool Safety Operating Procedures (PSOP)

• Observing and supervising pool users
• Educating pool users in the rules of the pool and water safety e.g. safe diving or no running
It is important to note that a lifeguard may need to leave their designated position or area of patrol
to intervene to prevent an accident or manage a situation.
Lifeguards must remain at their allocated lifeguard position unless making an intervention to prevent
accidents, manage a situation or respond to an emergency.
Lifeguards should:
(a) Intervene to prevent accidents and manage situations.
Critical intervention - a person’s life is in danger – the relevant EAP will be followed.
Non critical intervention - an accident could happen or events could lead to something more serious.
(b) In non critical interventions, deal with the pool user giving them clear instructions to stop their actions
and prevent an accident from happening.
(c) If it is necessary to leave your allocated position to undertake a non critical intervention it is essential
that you return to your allocated position and resume lifeguarding responsibilities as soon as possible.
(d) If a non critical intervention cannot be dealt with swiftly and you are unable to return to the normal
supervision position then summon for backup immediately (some pool operators will give a specific time
frame and will be contained within their NOP).
In critical interventions, initiate the EAP immediately.
3.2 10:20 Scanning System

The HSE publication ‘Managing Health and Safety in Swimming Pools’ says ‘Scanning is the skill required
to supervise a particular zone using a sweeping action. The internationally recognised practice known as
the 10:20 system requires lifeguards to be able to scan their supervision zone in 10 seconds and to be
close enough to get to an incident within 20 seconds’.
Therefore in your pool you should be able:
• To scan your zone within 10 seconds
• To reach an incident in the furthest part of the zone within 20 seconds
The 10:20 system is the most widely used scanning technique used by lifeguards in the world.
3.3 Programmed and unprogrammed

sessions
It is important that lifeguards understand the different types of session within a swimming pool. Each
session may have different risk factors and require different levels of supervision.
Generally programmed sessions have fewer risk factors due to the controlled and structured nature of the
activity e.g:
• Swimming lesson
• Aqua aerobics
• Swimming coaching or training
• Lifeguard training
Depending on the nature of the activity, the qualification of the instructors, and the number and ability of the
people in the water, lifeguard numbers may be altered to reflect the reduced risk of the activity. It is important
that the instructor and lifeguard are both aware of their roles and responsibilities in an emergency.
Below are some examples of unprogrammed swimming
• General swimming open to the public
• Inflatable or play session
• Senior swimming session
67
ELEMENT 3 – Swimming Pool supervision
3.4 Lifeguard Zones

A zone is the area of the pool a lifeguard is responsible for supervising.
There are a wide range of zones and the size, nature and scanning pattern required may vary due to:
• The design of the pool e.g. standard rectangular pool or a leisure pool
• The type of session e.g. fun session, inflatable session or programmed session (swimming lesson)
• Pool user load e.g. numbers of lifeguards are generally increased with higher numbers and this may
impact on the zones for each particular lifeguard
Zones will be detailed in the NOP and may be detailed and displayed at each Lifeguard position. The zones
may be parts of the pool or a specific feature or activity, for example:
• A programmed swimming zone
• The recreational area split into a number of overlapping parts
• Zones around an inflatable or fun session
• Areas around diving boards, flumes or when wave machines are in use
Certain zones may be small with increased lifeguard numbers for fun sessions or inflatable sessions as
examples. Where a pool may normally have two lifeguards this may increase to four depending on the
nature, type and design of the inflatable. Due to the increased excitement factor, number of blind spots
and risk due to the nature of the activity, lifeguard numbers may not only be increased, but rotation may
also be increased.
Zones can be varied in shapes and sizes, for example following the flow of the water in “river” features.
Where such features go outside the main building before coming back into another part of the building, more
lifeguards will be required to cover the full area of pool water so additional lifeguard supervision is necessary.
The pool operator will have worked out the best zone for lifeguard visibility and swimmer supervision, and
zones may be specific to each lifeguard or may overlap.
Zones and positions will have been calculated and worked out carefully to provide the best line of sight and
supervision for the lifeguard team by the pool operator. It is essential that you supervise the pool from your
designated position.
A good example where two or more lifeguards may be required to cover the same zone would be in a
leisure pool when the waves are on. Due to the increased level of risk, excitement factor and density of
swimmers, one or more lifeguards may be required.
NPLQ Generation 9
SwIMMInG POOL & SUPERVISIOn
Lifeguard Zone Visibility Test (LZVT)
Many pool operators will complete a LZVT to work out the best position for lifeguards to supervise the

whole zone they are responsible. The LZVT will test lifeguard visibility whilst managing some on the issues
that may be in place e.g. glare, reflection, blind spots, poor lighting etc.
A LZVT will be carried out for each type of session to identify the appropriate lifeguard positions and may
impact on lifeguard numbers where blind spots or poor visibility have been identified.
As zones have been specifically worked out to ensure the most suitable position to scan the pool, it is
essential that you do not deviate away from your specified zone and follow the centre’s NOP.
HSE publication ‘Managing Health and Safety in Swimming Pools’ says:

‘Conduct a LZVT first to establish the fields of view and the likely minimum level of observation. Consider
then the required number of lifeguards in a real-life situation. As an example, a leisure pool may have
moving water areas that have vegetation and corners obscuring the view for the lifeguards. Consider how
best to observe and supervise swimmers in these areas. You may also consider increasing the number of
staff and/or using technology to help existing lifeguards.’
3.4.1 Shared Zones

There may be some pool designs and situations where the lifeguard covers the full pool as their zone,
where the risk assessment has deemed this to be suitable.
Where it has been deemed that two lifeguards are required, the pool operator may decide that each
lifeguard’s zone covers half the pool each or both lifeguards zone is for the whole pool. (see plan below)
69
3.4.2 Individual Zones
It is essential that you know the boundaries of your zone to ensure no area of the pool is left unsupervised
with potentially disastrous effects. It is good to use physical features to mark out zones within the
swimming pool environment.
Within each zone it is important that the lifeguard can reach any point to rescue a casualty within 20
seconds. This is to ensure that the casualty is reached within a reasonable amount of time and also to
reduce the chance of further injury or deterioration to the casualty.
There are examples where the lifeguard may take advantage of their elevated position e.g up a flume tower
that also has a good view of leisure waters. In this situation it may be possilble to instruct a swimmer to
go use the flume when it is safe to do so and watch the swimmer exit the flume, with an overview of the
leisure waters. The Lifeguard can then safely instruct the next swimmer to go down the flume when it is
safe to do so.
NPLQ Generation 9
Structured activity

Draw the zones and lifeguard positions for the pool where you are doing the course
for one of the sessions below:
• General swimming
• Inflatable sessions
• Fun sessions
• Lane swimming
• Senior swim sessions
• Diving boards/sessions
• Galas and club sessions
• Parties and private hire
• Specialist activities e.g. scuba and canoeing
• Structured lessons and classes
• Water polo
• Parties and children’s parties
71
3.4.3 Lifeguard Zone Cards

The lifeguard zones will be clearly defined in the NOP and covered within your site specific induction and
ongoing training. To support the NOP and the lifeguards, some pool operators have laminated zone cards
next to each lifeguard position giving the following detail for each zone:
• Activity
• Number of lifeguards
• Area of pool and zone
• Specific hazards, rules and control measures
Sample Zone Card
Activity: General Swimming below two thirds No of lifeguards: 2

capacity of user load
Zone(s)
Green lifeguard zone covers:

Shallow end half of the main pool up to the central pillar including the access steps.
Orange lifeguard zone covers: From central pillar to deep end.
NPLQ Generation 9
Scanning

3.5

As we have covered, careful supervision by qualified and competent lifeguards and early intervention is the
best way to prevent accidents. To do this lifeguards need to scan the pool to ensure the full surface area
and volume of pool water is covered so that no swimmers are missed.
It is essential that lifeguards have a good level of vision suitable to meet the needs of the facility they are
working at.
What is scanning?
Lifeguards must learn how to scan effectively and take in all that is happening in a particular zone without
concentrating for so long on a particular point that the rest of the zone is not covered within a reasonable
amount of time. It can take seconds for someone to drown so it is important not to be distracted
unnecessarily leaving areas of the zone uncovered, thus increasing the chance of an accident or for an
opportunity to take early intervention to be missed.
How do you scan?

Scanning the pool means constantly watching either a particular part of the pool (zone) or the whole pool
using a sweeping action by moving your head. No matter what zoning system is being used, the principle
is the same and should include the whole environment as well as the pool itself.
Examples of scanning:
Some examples to watch out for include:
• Known hazards
• Swimmer numbers
• Swimmers submerging
• Anxiety or concern on pool users faces (either on the
side of the pool or in the water)
• Swimmers or pool users trying to attract your attention
• Erratic, frantic swimming or movements by an individual
bather
• The very young
• Inappropriate behaviour
73
It can sometimes be difficult to tell the difference between genuine indications of distress and playful
behaviour. It is far better to take action and find out it was not required than not to take action and realise
that early intervention would have prevented or reduced the severity of a potential serious incident.
Remember that observation is more than just looking. You must be able to identify potential hazards, spot
subtle reactions or expressions on pool users faces and ensure no swimmers require urgent assistance. It
uses all of your senses including hearing and smell, so:
• Listen for cries or calls for help, people arguing or equipment being broken or misused
• Listen for signals or instructions from other lifeguards
• Be aware of the smell of alcohol – it is a warning that certain swimmers may not be fit to swim
• The smell of chemicals or smoke may indicate an emergency within the building
Experience of the pool will also help – as you get to know the characteristics, sights, sounds, patterns and
rhythms of the pool area, you will immediately notice any break in the regular pattern.
Some swimmers may struggle (and this may be hard to notice in busy pools and still may be difficult during
quiet sessions) but others may become unconscious on the surface of the water or slip quietly below the
surface (often called the ‘silent drowning’). Scanning must include looking through the water to the bottom
of the pool as well as observing the surface. This also means you will be more aware of pool users who are
diving, jumping in, or swimming underwater.
Scanning Techniques
Lifeguards can scan their zone by steadily moving their line of sight across the zone, moving from left to
right ensuring the complete area of the zone covering the full volume of pool water is covered. This can
mean a lifeguard may have to move their head from side to side and up or down to cover the full zone
including the bottom of the pool close to the edge, particularly if they are in a high chair.
Focus on the pool users and what they are doing and make eye contact whenever possible. Faces often
give early warning of a potential incident, so look for signs of distress or concern.
Do not stare at one point or concentrate on one feature or swimmer for too long unnecessarily. When you
change position it is important that you do not stop observing your zone.
When you start your period of duty, scan your zone completely before taking over the zone. Note any
comments made by the lifeguard you are taking over from, but do not stop scanning when transferring
important or vital information between yourself and another lifeguard. This is also important when dealing
with customers and pool users. If necessary call for support from other team members if the scanning of
your zone is likely to become compromised.
3.5.1 Scanning Patterns

There are various different scanning patterns that can be used to supervise a swimming pool or zone.
below are some examples that can be used. Operators may give you a certain pattern you need to use or
you may find your own scanning pattern. You must ensure that you supervise the whole zone and scan it
every 10 seconds whilst supervising the pool.
It is important to scan through the water to the pool floor as swimmers can get into difficulty at any point
between the surface and the bottom of the pool. It can be easy to fall into the trap of just scanning the
pool surface.
NPLQ Generation 9
This example the lifeguard will scan from

one end of the pool to the other continually
moving along the pool for 10 seconds to
ensure the whole pool is covered.
The lifeguard would start back at the
beginning point after 10 seconds.
10 seconds scan
This example each lifeguard will scan from

one side of the pool to the other continually
moving along the pool for 10 seconds to
ensure their whole zone is covered.
This example the lifeguard will scan around

the pool in a circuit continually moving
towards the middle for 10 seconds to
Zone
This example the lifeguard will scan from

one side of the pool to the other continually
moving along then across the pool in the
other direction for 10 seconds the pool to
Zone
75
Scanning practice sheet

At your pool where you are doing the course, under the direction of the trainer stand or
sit in a suitable position for not less than 15 minutes to complete the scanning practice
sheet below.
The trainer will allocate you a specific zone.
Note: It is essential that you do not distract or talk to lifeguards carrying out supervision duties.
Name:
Date: Time: Zone:
Session type - General, lane or inflatable session etc:
• Write down/draw alarm points in the zone
• What depths and gradients are in

the zone?
• What hazards are in zone?
• What was the maximum number

of pool users in zone during
supervision session?
• What was the highest number of:
• Adults
• Children
• Infants
• Give example(s) where early

intervention can be used within the
zone
• List pool rules specific to the zone
• Record any dangerous swimmer

activity
Feedback results of scanning exercise to group.
NPLQ Generation 9
Maintaining Concentration

3.6

Self control/motivation.
• Never talk on poolside unless:
A colleague is passing on vital information
You need to speak with a pool user to intervene to prevent an accident
You need to educate a pool user in the safety rules
A customer asks a question and you politely avoid being distracted from supervising the pool by
keeping conversation to an absolute minimum
In all cases, call for team support to assist you if your supervision duties are or will be compromised.
• Lifeguards must make sure they turn up for work in a fit and appropriate state i.e. not over tired or
hung-over from the night before!
• Lifeguards must never be tempted to take personal mobile phones onto poolside. This not only could
lead to an unnecessary distraction but you could miss an accident and potentially face disciplinary
action with your employer, plus criminal action in the courts.
We recommend
• As a lifeguard you need to be able to identify when your levels of alertness may be dropping (for example,
you catch yourself daydreaming) and take action to ensure suitable levels of supervision are maintained.
Raise alertness levels by completing the following every 5 minutes:
• Posture – checking your posture
• Position – alter your sitting or standing position
• Pattern – change your scanning pattern
You could head count the numbers of swimmers within your zone every 5 minutes and/or mentally identify
the swimmers most at risk in your zone.
Other common techniques used whilst scanning by continually identifying:
• How many male and female swimmers are in the zone
• How many swimmers are wearing goggles
• How many children under eight are in your zone
• Swimmers that could potentially get into difficulty
To help lifeguards remain alert and to maintain a good level of supervision at all times, the RLSS UK
recommends that:
No one on duty at the poolside for a long time can be expected to remain alert. RLSS UK
recommends that you spend no longer than 60 minutes at the poolside and in exceptional
circumstances, no longer than 90 minutes in the pool hall itself.
Regular rotation between lifeguard positions of 15, 20 or 30 minute period (set by the pool operator) may
also assist the lifeguard to remain alert.
Your employer has a responsibility to ensure workers and in particular young workers (under 18s) are
allocated suitable rest periods and time between shifts in line with current legal requirements including the
European Working Time Directive.
77
3.7 LIfEGuaRd NuMbERS aNd POSITIONS

Due to the nature, type, size, shape and design of swimming pool facilities, it is impossible to have a
clear-cut rule detailing the number of lifeguards required at any particular pool. This can only be worked out
after completing a Risk Assessment for each pool and activity. The results of the Risk Assessment would
then enable a pool operator to detail the number of lifeguards required within their NOP.
Lifeguard positions can either be static which means observing swimmers from a fixed position on the
poolside or a high chair, or mobile which means patrolling around a particular area of the pool. A number of
factors will be considered by the pool operator and may include:
• Size and design of the pool
• Activities taking place
• Pool features
• Number of pool users
• Hazards
3.7.1 Patrolling Lifeguard

Patrolling lifeguards work well in some facilities/sessions and may be used to ensure visibility around a blind
spot within a zone. The patrolling area will be clearly defined, and will be contained within the NOP.
If a patrolling lifeguard is allocated a zone they must still scan it every 10 seconds.
This example shows a patrolling area in a leisure pool defined so the lifeguard can see around a pillar within
their zone.
A patrolling lifeguard works well when a pool is busy. The patrolling lifeguard can be directed by the static
lifeguards to educate and interact directly with swimmers, for example, to intervene where there may be
occurrences of dangerous behaviour, and educate pool users knowing that the static lifeguard positions
are covering the full pool area and zones within it.
NPLQ Generation 9
This example is particularly supportive for lifeguard supervision as lifeguards can rotate between a static
standing position in the shallow end, a static position in a high chair at the deep end and a patrolling

position giving variety in supervision duties and zones.
Deep End Shallow End
3.7.2 High Chair

Getting up and down from the high chair safely is important and this would form part of the induction
process and ongoing training. It is particularly important to remember during an incident to get down from
the chair using the appropriate method, and not be tempted to jump.
The benefits of a high chair are:
• A wide field of view
• Less reflection and glare from the surface of the pool
• A clear view of the bottom of the pool, even in deep water
• Distances you from noise, splashing and other distractions
• Makes you more visible to pool users
View from side of pool Elevated high chair view
79
3.8 Visibility
Lifeguard positions for effective bather observation.
These are some of things that might affect lifeguard visibility of their zones:
• Glare
• Reflection
• Blind spots
• Poor lighting
• Turbulence
• Water clarity
All the issues mentioned above may affect pool visibility on their own or you may find that in some
situations pools may suffer from several of the issues at the same time.
It is essential that if any of the above impact on your ability to supervise the pool effectively, you must
inform your line manager immediately so suitable action can be taken to ensure swimmers safety.
3.8.1 Reflection and Glare (Natural Light)

Too much light can be more of a problem than not enough light. Sunlight falling directly onto the water can
make the surface seem almost like a mirror (reflection) and it may be difficult, maybe even impossible, to
see through the water to the bottom of the pool or anyone below the surface. Be aware of the problems of
reflection and glare. The NOP will detail your lifeguard positions for optimum visibility.
Reflection
Glare
Glare is a very harsh bright dazzling light caused when sun or artificial light bounces off the surface of the
water. This sort of light can cause discomfort and make it very difficult to see through the water.
The impact of glare can be minimised in outdoor pools by lifeguards wearing polarised sun glasses.
Pools with significant amounts of glazing can suffer from increased glare.
NPLQ Generation 9
3.8.2 Blind Spots
Blind spots can be caused by:

• Equipment in the pool e.g. inflatable, play mats etc
• Pool design e.g. irregular shape, walls and pillars
• Swimmers (influx of high numbers)
It is not always obvious what may impact on your visibility and simple things like lane ropes or the colour of
the tiles on the pool floor can make it harder to view swimmers and potentially casualties.
If your ability to view your zone is impacted upon in any way, ensure you report it immediately so
appropriate action can be taken.
3.8.3 Pool Lighting

Poor or old pool lighting can impact on the lifeguard’s ability to see through the water.
The design and positioning of the pool lighting all has a part to play on how well the pool is lit, however the
most common issue is the need for lightbulbs to be replaced as they fail. If you notice that a lightbulb has
failed, report it immediately.
It is common for pool lights to feature on the daily check list so any faults can be reported in a timely manner.
3.8.4 Turbulence
Surface water turbulence created by waves or rapids, or even swimmers can impact on your ability to see
through the water and even a small amount of surface turbulence can have a big impact on the ability to
see swimmers or objects under the water.
You can see in the pictures below how an empty pool can be significantly distorted just by splashing gently
in one corner.
3.8.5 Water Clarity

Water visibility can deteriorate suddenly or gradually for several reasons making it difficult to see through
the water.
Examples that can impact on water clarity are:
• Air e.g minute bubbles that can be drawn into the system making water appear cloudy
• Dirt, sun cream and make up which can dissolve in the water or create a film on the surface
• Chemical imbalance
81
3.9 Maximum pool user loads

The pool user loads for a pool can vary by type of session and equipment in the pool as some activities are
higher risk and others may restrict the amount of water space available. Consequently your pool operator
will have considered these varying factors and in doing so will have set out maximum pool user loads in the
NOP for each activity with the pool. A sample of which is shown below.
Maximum pool An NOP will to detail the maximum pool A lifeguard must always be aware of
user loads user loads for the pool including each the number of swimmers within their
type of session, here are some examples: zone and know when to call for back-
• Inflatable up or support to increase numbers as
• Fun/mat session per the centre’s procedures.
• Lane swimming These methods might include:
• Senior swim sessions • Counting the number of swimmers
• Galas and club sessions within your allocated zone every five
• Parties and private hire minutes to help maintain vigilance
• Specialist activities e.g. scuba and • By recording swimmer numbers on a
canoeing head count sheet upon rotation
• Structured lessons and classes • Call for assistance when the
• Water polo pool user loads are nearing their
maximum
• Parties
• Ensure you follow the zone plan set
The type of session and equipment will out by employer for each session
also impact and may alter:
• Number of lifeguards
• Zones
As pool user numbers increase, the NOP
will also detail the increase in lifeguard
numbers and their positions.
Your NOP will also identify the methods
to control swimmer numbers. Many
facilities use a band system that counts
the number of swimmers into the pool
and gives them a time limit for their swim
and the swimmers are then called out at
set intervals.
Many pools control swimmer numbers at
reception with the lifeguards acting as a
backup.
Pool user loads may be different for each
pool within one facility.
NPLQ Generation 9
Lifeguard Rotation

3.10

In order to help maintain vigilance, lifeguards rotate between different zones. It is important to pass on
vital information on rotation but this should only take a matter of seconds. Should this be any longer then
please seek further assistance.
High chair rotation
83
3.11 USE OF TECHNOLOGY FOR LIFEGUARDS

With the improvement and advances in technology some swimming pools have systems installed in to
assist lifeguards to supervise a pool. Systems fall into 3 categories:
• Drowning detection systems
• Personal wearable drowning detection systems
• Underwater cameras
• Motion sensors
• Poolside mirrors
HSE publication ‘Managing Health in Swimming Pools’ says:
‘These systems are essentially intended to support observation by lifeguards and not replace them.
However, in situations where your risk assessment has already determined that you do not need constant
poolside supervision, some systems can provide additional reassurance. It is important to remember that
while these devices are useful, they cannot perform a rescue, so arrangements to respond to an incident
will still be necessary.’
Drowning detection systems

Detection systems have cameras installed either
in the swimming pool, overhead or a combination
of both. The cameras and computer software
monitors activity and tracks swimmer patterns in
order to recognise when a swimmer is in difficulty. It
will then raise an alarm to indicate to a lifeguard that
someone needs immediate assistance.
These systems do vary, from spotting a swimmer in
difficulty to only spotting a swimmer when they are
motionless on the bottom of the pool.
These systems have a screen which shows a lifeguard specifically where in the swimming pool the
swimmer in difficulty has been identified.
Personal wearable drowning detection systems

Swimmers wear a wrist band or other device
with sensors that monitor their movement in the
swimming pool. A sensor will detect a period of
static movement for a prolonged period under the
water and raise an alarm to indicate to a lifeguard
that someone needs immediate assistance.
In some systems when the device passes below
a certain depth for a period of time the sensor will
detect a problem and sound the alarm.
These systems rely on the swimmers wearing the
personal detection device throughout their use of
the swimming pool.
NPLQ Generation 9
Underwater and overhead cameras
These systems include underwater and overhead cameras that provide lifeguards with a view of part or

the whole of their zone. These systems are frequently used to provide lifeguards with the visibility of a blind
spot or area that they cannot physically see. For example, behind a water feature or a particularly deep
part of water or where there is excessive glare on the surface.
Cameras tend to be linked to a screen that the lifeguard can view when lifeguarding. The screen will give
the lifeguard a view of part or all of their zone. These systems do not raise an alarm automatically.
As the lifeguard will need to view the screen the NOP should outline the frequency and duration that the
lifeguard should scan their monitor for any swimmers in difficulty. It is important that the lifeguard can still
achieve the 10:20 system of bather supervision and scan their zone in 10 second, which may include
the screen.
Motion sensors
Some pools have motion sensors that will sound an alarm to alert you when someone or something
disturbs the surface of the pool or break a boundary around the pool. These are often used when
swimming pools are closed and operators cannot restrict access.
Working with technology

If you are working in a swimming pool with technology installed it is important that you receive the following
training and ensure you fully understand the system:
• How to use the system
• How to achieve a 10 second scan using the system (to ensure you can achieve the 10:20 system of
bather supervision)
• What the alarm(s) sounds like and/or looks like
• What action you should take when the alarm is raised
• What actions you should take if the system partially/fully fails
Training should take account of the manufacturer’s instructions as well as the PSOP. Operators should
make sure the equipment is tested and maintained in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
It is important to remember that a lifeguard can supervise and educate swimmers to protect their safety as
well as anticipate problems and intervene early to prevent an accident from occurring.
Technology can only (in some cases) identify a swimmer is in difficulty but lifeguards are still required to
perform a rescue and give immediate and lifesaving first aid.
85
3.12 Lifeguards duties and responsibilities

Pool operators will have set out a procedure within the NOP of the lifeguard duties and responsibilities. A
sample of the content and your role within the NOP is detailed below.
Lifeguards Your employer will have a procedure • Understand and apply the rules of
duties and for special supervision requirements for your pool in accordance with your
responsibilities. equipment and specialist activities; for training and the procedure set out
example diving and jumping: by your employer
• Principles of safe diving and jumping • Communicate with pool users to
• When no diving is the rule ensure their safety:
• Types of dive from the poolside - Prevention through education
• Competitive starts (starting blocks and - Prevention through supervision
shallow dives) and swimming galas - Customer care
Training and qualification - Controlling access
requirements - Preventing unauthorised access
Coaches and trainers You must attend staff training in
Swimmers accordance with the policy set out by
• Starting blocks your employer.
Systems of work for set-up and take This procedure will give you a plan
down of equipment of your staff training attendance
Safety checks prior to use requirements, what training you will
Fault reporting procedure undertake and the standard to which
• Diving boards, diving pools and diving your competence must be maintained.
areas
Controlling the diving area, in and Failure to follow this procedure could
out of use mean that you will not be able to
• Safety signs undertake lifeguard duties and may
result in disciplinary procedures being
No diving
brought against you. In some cases
Depth signage
this could result in losing your job.
Monthly lifeguard training & competency
Ensure you follow the zone plan set out
assessment including:
by employer for each session
• Qualification and ongoing training and
competency assessment policy Understand and follow the
Lifeguard qualification requirements communication systems set out by
Competence your employer.
Induction Communicate with pool users to
Uniform and equipment ensure their safety.
Allocation of sessions
Follow your training in these
Managing competency issues
procedures.
Managing annual leave
Return to work policy
Sickness or injury policy
Number of lifeguards, positions and zones
for particular activities for example:
General swimming
Inflatable sessions
Fun sessions
Lane swimming
Senior swim sessions
Diving boards/sessions
Galas and club sessions
NPLQ Generation 9

Parties and private hire
Specialist activities e.g. scuba and
canoeing
Structured lessons and classes
Water polo
Pool parties and children’s parties
3.13 Communication on poolside

Communication is essential whether for normal day-to-day operations or in an emergency.
Without good and effective communication between the lifeguards and team within the whole leisure
centre, the ability to intervene early, react and respond to emergencies would be compromised. With this in
mind, communication is one of the most important tools that a lifeguard will use.
Communication is key to enable you to supervise a pool properly. This means effective communication
with pool users, other lifeguards, reception and the Duty Manager/Management Team. In the pool area it
helps you to keep order, create the right atmosphere and to maintain good customer relations. The way
you approach common lifeguard supervision duties can impact on the smooth running of the pool and the
customer’s perception of you and their attitude towards you.
3.13.1 Types of Communication

• Whistle
• Verbal
• Hand signals
• Communication equipment and alarms
A whistle gets attention and you can then give instructions, although your whistle should only be used
when necessary.
Hand or whistle signals have a part to play, however your most useful tool is your voice backed up with
the right body language. Your posture, appearance, facial expressions and gestures send out all kinds
of signals to pool users. A friendly, polite,
professional but firm manner will help you get
the most positive response from the users of
the pool, and creating the right atmosphere is
essential, not only in helping people enjoy their
visit but also assisting with providing a safe
and friendly pool environment.
Equally, a straightforward friendly explanation
of safety rules (and why they are in place)
or use of the pool equipment helps build
good customer relations which is important,
particularly if there is an emergency.
87
Whistles
Most pool users will respond to a short blast to attract their
attention and the lifeguard can then follow this up with either a
clearly spoken instruction or a hand signal. It is important that the
whistle is not overused so that pool users do not start to ignore it.
All staff at a pool should know what a given signal means. The use
of the whistle and the same signals should also be used during
any ongoing lifeguard training, and in particular for incident training
to ensure the lifeguard reacts naturally and the use of the whistle
becomes an automatic response in an emergency.
The signals listed below are widely used and are recommended by
the RLSS UK:
• One short blast calls for the attention of a pool user
• Two short blasts calls for the attention of another
lifeguard
• Three short blasts indicates that a lifeguard is taking
emergency action
• One long blast used to indicate to pool users that the
pool is about to be cleared
Verbal
Using your voice may not be practical in a loud busy pool and it is essential that verbal communication
between lifeguards is kept to a minimum for essential information only as idle chat will take your attention
away from observing the pool users.
It is also important for the lifeguards to educate pool users with regard to dangerous practices or general
information to maintain the safety of the pool environment.
Language barriers – remember not to assume that all customers speak or understand your language.
Speech can be a good way of educating pool users without being too authoritarian. Your manner and tone
of voice is important to ensure you come across in a friendly and confident manner. This is particularly
important when speaking with individuals or adults who may not like a younger lifeguard ‘telling them what
to do’.
Consider how you would ask a swimmer who is swimming too slowly in the fast lane during a public lane
swimming session to move into the slow lane as they are holding faster swimmers up?
• If you do not intervene, you could upset and frustrate the faster swimmers in the lane leading them to
speak and complain to you
• Inaction can also lead to ‘lane rage’ with arguments between swimmers and in extreme cases even
deliberate physical contact
• The likelihood of a collision or accident is increased
• If when speaking with the slower swimmer you do not deal with the situation tactfully, confidently and
with polite explanation, the swimmer may be upset, complain or even refuse to move
NPLQ Generation 9
Hand signals
Hand signals are very useful when background noise makes it hard to hear someone speaking. They are

also useful when there is considerable distance between lifeguards, however there is no standardised
“language” so pool operators would detail the agreed hand signals that work in their facility. These should
be explained in the site’s NOP and should be practiced during ongoing training and incident training. The
combination of whistle and hand signals can also be effective to support lifeguard communication.
Some signals are self-explanatory and others would only be understood between trained lifeguards
communicating between each other. Hand signals usually also need to be followed up by an explanation.
Hand signals may differ from pool to pool. Hand signals need to be clear, obvious and appropriate!
Below are some examples:
1 2 3
1. Stop (what you are doing or stay where you are)

Extend the arm forward and raise the hand palm outward. This can be used in conjunction with the whistle
or voice.
2. Look over there

Extend the arm and point with the index finger.
This signal can be used to indicate something
to either a pool user or to another team
member e.g. weak swimmer in armbands
moving towards deep water.
3. Ok (or “I understand”)
4. Press the assistance alarm

This can be used in conjunction with the 4 5
whistle or voice prior to beginning a rescue of
calling for urgent assistance if you are not near
an assistance alarm point.
5. First aid assistance required

This signal can also be used in conjunction with the whistle
or voice. This will not only indicate that first aid assistance is
required but it can be used to inform team members to bring
the first aid kit to you.
6. Call attention
Raise the arm straight up above the head and extend the
hand and fingers (this signal can be used to attract the
attention of another team member).
89
3.13.2 Communication Equipment and Alarms

Equipment
Lifeguards can draw on a range of equipment to aid with communication. Below are some examples of
communication tools available at most facilities.
They include:
• Two way radio systems
• Telephones
• Alarm systems
Two way radio systems

The use of portable, two-way radios is common in many leisure facilities, especially in larger leisure centres.
They can be really useful, especially as they can be used almost anywhere in the building even if there is a
lot of noise.
Telephones
Although telephones are often installed in pools, they are of limited use for lifeguard-to-lifeguard
communication.
If a pool operator supplies telephones or radios, the NOP must set out the way they should be used.
Lifeguards must be fully trained in using them and should only use them for the purpose that they
have been supplied. You should never rely on them as a sole means of communication especially in
emergency situations.
Benefits:
If a pool operator supplies telephones or radios, the NOP must set out the way they should be used.
Lifeguards must be fully trained in using them and should only use them for the purpose that they
have been supplied. You should never rely on them as a sole means of communication especially in
emergency situations.
Benefits:
• Allows information in an emergency to be passed on quickly and effectively
• Means of attracting support to poolside to ensure that you are not distracted from your duties
Some facilities provide mobile phones as a means of communication and should only be used in
accordance with the facilities procedures.
Personal mobile phones must never be used on poolside or any other distraction such as smart
phones or watches etc.
Alarm systems
You will receive training on all alarm systems, their functions and sounds as part of your induction and
ongoing training.
Poolside Assistance Alarm

Most pools will have alarms on poolside to summon
assistance in the event of an emergency. For
example, the lifeguard should use the assistance
alarm when:
• You or another lifeguard on poolside are
carrying out a rescue
• There is a serious first aid incident
• There is a threat of violence or personal assault
• There is a sudden lack of water clarity
Evacuation Alarm
Only use fire alarms in accordance with your training
as they will normally denote a full evacuation of the building.
NPLQ Generation 9
Audible Alerts
There are a number of possible audible alerts within swimming pools which may include:

• Wave machine alert
• Poolside features
• Moveable floor
• Emergency exit door
There may be some alarms that have a visual alert, such as a flashing light that accompanies an audible alert.
Pool operators will have set out a procedure within the NOP detailing alarm systems and emergency
equipment. A sample of the content and your role within the NOP is detailed below.
3.14 Details of alarm systems and

emergency equipment and
maintenance arrangements
Details of alarm In addition to detailing a plan of the It is essential that you follow the
systems and facility and the equipment and facilities systems and procedures set out
emergency therein, your employer will also detail very by your employer. Again, these
equipment, specifically the alarm systems, how they arrangements have been developed to
maintenance work and how they are maintained and protect you and the users of the pool.
arrangements. equally any emergency equipment. A All damage to equipment or any
detailed plan and procedure example is equipment failure must be reported
shown below: immediately to your line manager.
• Position and use of pool assistance
alarms Do not misuse any equipment provided
• All alarm systems, checks, records and to you.
maintenance service contracts: Ensure users of the facility are familiar
Building and premises with alarm systems where appropriate.
Pool Only use equipment you are trained
Sauna, spa and steam room and authorised to use.
Disabled toilet
Ensure evacuation and emergency
Sun bed
routes are accessible at all times.
Lift
Plant room, chlorine, carbon Do not remove emergency equipment
monoxide, ozone etc from its designated location unless you
• Emergency equipment: are required to use it in an emergency.
Building evacuation bag
Pocket masks
AED and oxygen
Spinal board
Stretcher
Rescue equipment
- Torpedo buoy
- Reach poles
- Throw bags
• Operation
• Location
• Testing arrangements and maintenance
91
Activity
Draw a plan of the swimming pool and changing rooms at the course facility.
Identify on the plan where the alarms are and emergency equipment.
NPLQ Generation 9

1. Why is early intervention so important?
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. How can lifeguards prevent accidents?
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. What is the 10:20 scanning system?
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. What is a zone?
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Why is it important to ensure you scan your specific zone?
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. What should you look, listen and smell for when scanning?
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. Why is it a good idea to change scanning patterns?
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
8. Give 4 benefits of a high chair lifeguard position?
i) ______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
ii) ______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
iii) _____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
iv) _____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
93

9. What could cause blind spots?
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
10. What are maximum user loads?
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
11. Name three methods a lifeguard may use to communicate:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
12. Explain the whistle communication system recommended by the RLSS UK:
i) One short blast __________________________________________________________________________________________________
ii) Two short blasts _________________________________________________________________________________________________
iii) Three short blasts ______________________________________________________________________________________________
iv) One long blast ___________________________________________________________________________________________________
13. When should a lifeguard use a poolside assistance alarm?
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
14. Name one advantage to using technology systems:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
15. What training should you receive to lifeguard using technology?
_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Further revision questions are available on our website www.rlss.org.uk.
NPLQ Generation 9
SECTION 2
intervention, rescue &
emergency action plan
ELEMENT 1
Intervention & Rescue
ELEMENT 2
Rescue of a Casualty with
a Suspected Spinal Injury
ELEMENT 3
Emergency Action Plan
95
Section 2 Intervention, Rescue and Emergency Action Plan
CONTENTS
Element 1: Element 2:
Intervention and Rescue Rescue of a casualty with a
1.0 Swimming Pool Survey.........................................98 suspected spinal injury
1.1 Putting the Casualty First......................................98 2.0 The Spine and Spinal Cord.................................124
1.2 Teamwork..............................................................99 2.0.1 The Spine................................................124
1.3 Identifying an Emergency......................................99 2.0.2 The Spinal Cord and the Nervous System.125
1.4 Types of Casualty................................................100 2.1 Recognising a Potential Spinal Injury..................125
1.4.1 Responsive Casualties............................100 2.2 Principles of Casualty Management....................126
1.4.2 Unresponsive Casualties.........................101 2.3 Incident Management Priorities..........................126
1.5 Lifeguard Entries.................................................103 2.4 Rescue Techniques.............................................127
1.5.1 Slide-in Entry...........................................103 2.4.1 Vice Grip .................................................127
1.5.2 Step or Walk-in Entry..............................103 2.4.2 Head Splint..............................................129
1.5.3 Straddle Entry..........................................104 2.4.3 Stabilisation in Shallow Water.................131
1.5.4 Shallow Dive............................................104 2.5 Removal of a Casualty with a Suspected Spinal
1.5.5 Diving with a Torpedo Buoy....................105 Injury from the Water...........................................132
1.6 Personal Safety During Rescue...........................105 2.5.1 Removal of a Casualty using a
1.6.1 Defensive Block with Torpedo Buoy.......105 Rescue Board..........................................132
1.6.2 General Principles of Escape..................106 2.5.2 Recovery when a Rescue Board
1.6.3 Separating Multiple Casualties................106 is not Available or the Casualty
1.7 Rescue Equipment..............................................106 is Unresponsive.......................................136
1.7.1 Torpedo Buoy..........................................107 2.5.3 Casualty Aftercare...................................138
1.7.2 Reaching Poles.......................................107 2.5.4 Recovery from the Water using a
1.7.3 Throw Bags.............................................108 Pool Extraction Board.............................139
1.8 Types of Rescues................................................108 • Deck level pool – shallow water
1.8.1 Poolside Based Rescues........................108 method.................................................142
• Shout and signal..................................108 • Deck level pool – deep water method...146
• Reaching and throwing rescues..........109 • Pool with freeboard, maximum 30cm
1.8.2 In-Water Rescues....................................110 – shallow water method.......................146
• Wading rescues...................................111 • Pool with freeboard, maximum 30cm
• Non-contact tow (using torpedo buoy).. 111 – deep water method...........................148
1.8.3 Contact Tows..........................................112 • Using a PXB with narrow pool
• Extended arm tow................................112 surround – deck level...........................150
1.8.4 Support Tows..........................................112 • Using a PXB with narrow pool
• Arm support tow..................................113 surround – freeboard...........................151
• Hip support tow...................................113 • Using a PXB in a leisure pool...............151
• Under shoulder support tow................113 • Recovery for an unconscious casualty..154
1.9 Rescue Skills.......................................................114 Revision : Section 2 Element 2.....................................155
1.9.1 Turning Unconscious Casualty on
the Surface of the Pool............................114 Element 3:
1.9.2 Recovering Submerged Casualties.........114
1.9.3 Feet First Surface Dive............................114
Emergency action plan (EAP)
1.9.4 Head First Surface Dive..........................115 3.0 The Role of Each Person in the Emergency
1.9.5 Deep Dive and Rescue............................115 Action Plan..........................................................156
1.9.6 Swimming Underwater............................116 3.1 Incident Management..........................................157
1.9.7 Rescuing Multiple Casualties..................116 3.2 Overcrowding......................................................157
1.10 Casualty Recovery and Exits from the Water......118 3.3 Disorderly Behaviour...........................................158
1.10.1 Rescue from Beach or Shallow 3.4 Lost or Found Child.............................................158
Water Area...............................................118 3.5 Lack of Water Clarity...........................................159
• Assisted walk out.................................118 3.6 Fire and Evacuation Procedures.........................159
• Pull ashore...........................................118 3.7 Bomb Threat........................................................160
1.10.2 Stirrup Lift................................................118 3.8 Lighting or Power Failure....................................161
1.10.3 Assisted Lift.............................................119 3.9 Structural, Component or Equipment Failure......162
1.11 Rescue Pathway..................................................122 3.10 Toxic Gas Emission or Chemical Spill.................163
3.11 Serious Injury to a Member of the Public............163
Revision : Section 2 Element 1.....................................123
3.12 Discovery of Casualty in the Water.....................164
3.13 Faecal, Blood or Vomit Pool Water
Contamination.....................................................165
Revision : Section 2 Element 3.....................................166
NPLQ Generation 9
ELEMENT 1 –
Intervention and Rescue
What we will cover
It is important to remember that good lifeguard
supervision and early intervention can prevent
many pool incidents from occurring, however
in some cases it may be impossible to prevent
an emergency even when the best observation
and supervision skills are applied by the
lifeguard team.
It is not uncommon for a swimmer in the water to

alert the lifeguard to a developing emergency as
the swimmer may be directly next to the casualty,
or be a friend or relative and notice something
is wrong with a swimmer before it becomes
noticeable to a lifeguard. It is also important to
rescue & emergency action PLAN

remember that an emergency could develop while
you are scanning your zone. Unless it is a very
small zone you may miss the initial development
of an emergency because your scan may be in
SECTION 2: intervention,
a different part of the zone (within the 10 second
period).
This section concentrates on managing
emergencies within the swimming pool
environment that could be in the water, around
poolside or emergencies involving swimming pool
features e.g. diving boards or water slides. There
are common principles which can be applied
when dealing with emergencies. The Emergency Action Plan (EAP) will detail the processes involved in
performing specific types of rescues, normally under the following headings:
• Discovery of a casualty in the water
• Serious injury to a bather
97
ELEMENT 1 – Intervention and rescue
1.0 SWIMMING POOL SURVEY

The RLSS UK carried out a survey of 75 pools within a 24 month period recording swimming pool rescues.
Over the 2 year period there were a total of 1205 rescues performed by lifeguards.
The results show the need for lifeguards, and it is important to point out that the figures represent the
number of rescues and do not include interventions by lifeguards that have prevented the need for a
rescue. For example, a lifeguard may intervene and stop a non-swimmer jumping into the deep end.
Rescue by session type Rescue by age of casualty
Swimming lessons – Children – 807 casualties

263 rescues were performed Adults – 289 casualties
Inflatable sessions – Senior – 109 casualties
254 rescues were performed
Lane swimming session –
Rescue by facility:
Leisure Pool (15 of 75) –

Standard swimming pool (57 of 75) –
Lido/outdoor swimming pool (3 of 75) –
Never forget the importance of lifeguards to prevent accidents and perform rescues,
if required!
1.1 PUTTING THE CASUALTY FIRST

In an emergency, seconds can make all the difference.
Within a well managed pool with lifeguards, you can put the casualty first for the following reasons:
You have:
• Team support (other lifeguard or lifeguards)
• Back up (trained staff members)
• Clear lines of communication in an emergency
• Detailed emergency action plan in place
• Rescue equipment
• Knowledge of the environment
If you see a casualty ACT and RESCUE without delay – make the casualty your priority.
If in doubt get in and get them out.
NPLQ Generation 9
1.2 Teamwork
As mentioned in section one, working effectively as a team is essential in maintaining the smooth running
of the pool. In an emergency it is extremely important that the team is able to work well together.
Through regular ongoing training your skills will be maintained and in particular through incident training,
effective teamwork will be put to the test to ensure that your team will work effectively in an emergency.
An in-water rescue can be physically demanding even with a small casualty. Help from other lifeguards
in recovering the casualty onto the poolside is vital to make the whole procedure as quick and as safe as
possible.
You need to remain alert and be ready to apply skills required to deal with the situation.
1.3 Identifying an Emergency

Emergencies can happen at any time and it is important that you do not assume that because the pool is
quiet you can relax and stop scanning the pool.
By applying the supervision skills covered in section one, in many cases this can prevent an emergency
from occurring. You will need to be able to identify the early stages of an emergency so you can intervene

and take swift action to reduce the severity of the emergency where possible.
Some indicators to an emergency can be very subtle and may include:
• A member of public looking into the pool with a concerned expression on their face – they may be
looking at someone in difficulty
• A customer just saying “excuse me are they all right?” while pointing in the direction of another swimmer
• A swimmer with a pained expression on their face
• A swimmer floating in the water (at any point from the surface to the pool bottom)
• A swimmer at the side of the pool resting their head on their arms
• A swimmer behaving in an unusual way (not normal)
Some emergencies may be more obvious including:

• Shout or cry for help
• Obvious signs of a swimmer in distress and
struggling in the water
• Swimmer on the bottom of the pool
• Bleeding casualty
When you see what seems to be a developing

emergency, your response should be instinctive due
to your regular ongoing training and in particular,
incident training.
If you are unsure whether a swimmer is fooling
around or is actually in difficulty, it is far better to
react and initiate the emergency response than to
delay a rescue.
Any action or behaviour that is not normal must be investigated

Remember - If in doubt get in and get them out!
99
1.4 Types of Casualty

Casualties can be split into two groups.
• Responsive
• Unresponsive
Responsive – may be able to help themselves.

In the early stages of drowning a casualty may be able to help themselves, however the ability of the casualty
to be able to help themselves will deteriorate rapidly and immediate lifeguard intervention is required.
Responsive casualties may be able to shout for help, follow lifeguard instruction and help themselves.
Examples of a responsive swimmer:
• Weak and/or tired swimmer
• Swimmer with a minor injury or medical emergency (e.g. nose bleed)
Unresponsive – unable to help themselves.

Unresponsive casualties will not be able to respond to lifeguard instructions, help themselves or aid in their
own rescue. It is essential that the lifeguard can act immediately, put the casualty first and affect a rescue
without hesitation or delay to increase the chances of survival.
Examples of unresponsive swimmer(s):
• Panicking casualty
• Non swimmer
• Injured swimmer
• Serious medical emergency
• Panicking locked swimmers
• Unconscious casualty
1.4.1 Responsive Casualties

Weak and/or tired swimmer
The casualty, either through fatigue or poor swimming ability, cannot reach a point of support easily.
They may be able to:
• Wave or call
• Respond to instruction
• Cooperate when support is offered
• Be able to rescue themselves
They are likely to:

• Be at an angle in the water
• Have limited forward motion
NPLQ Generation 9
In the early stages they are a responsive casualty, but may deteriorate rapidly and become unresponsive.
Swimmers who need buoyancy aids may get into difficulty extremely
quickly if their buoyancy aids fail or an arm band slips off. This is why
swimmers even with buoyancy aids still require close supervision by a
parent or guardian in the water.
Swimmer with a minor injury or medical emergency

The type of injury and a casualty’s swimming ability will determine
how the casualty behaves and indicate if they are responsive or
unresponsive.
An example of injuries may include:
• Cramp
• Bumps and bruises
• Bleeds, including nose bleeds
• Strained muscle
• Head Injury
• Dislocation

A swimmer with an injury may (depending
on severity of injury and swimming ability):
• Have an expression of pain on their
face
• Be static in the water but able to
attract attention
• Hold the part of their body affected
or their injured limb
Your priority is to rescue the casualty; however you may be able to adapt the rescue to prevent further
injury or pain to the casualty. Rescue techniques are covered later in this section.
1.4.2 Unresponsive Casualties

Non-swimmer
A non-swimmer is someone that cannot swim, if in water out of their depth they cannot maintain their
position with their head above the water to breathe.
The length of time that a casualty is able to struggle varies. Factors such as health, fitness, type of injury and
swimming ability all impact on how long a casualty is able to stay above water.
A non-swimmer would be unresponsive and unable to help themselves.
101
A drowning non-swimmer’s priority is to breathe. Through various videos captured over the past few years,
RLSS UK have gained information about how non-swimmers behave. There are lots of variations to their
behaviour, here are some examples:
• Vertical in the water
• Not shouting or calling for help
• Have their head out of the water in the very early stages
• Bob up and down, take a gulp of air then sink below the surface
• Push down with their arms, re-surface and gasp for air with their head tilted back
• Sink again as their arms extend over their head
• Fighting to get to the surface
• Submerged under water and not returning to surface
Please remember if a swimmer is not acting normally or you are in any doubt as to their actions,
you must act immediately to investigate
Swimmer with a medical emergency

The characteristics of each swimmer will vary depending on the nature, type and severity of the medical
emergency. If the medical emergency is minor the casualty may be responsive and able to help
themselves, however a serious medical emergency could render the swimmer unresponsive.
It is important to act quickly, any swimmer with a medical emergency can quickly turn into a non-swimmer.
Examples of medical emergencies that may impact on a swimmer’s ability and where they would require
lifeguard intervention would be:
• Asthma attack • Heart attack
• Angina attack • Stroke
• Diabetic emergency • Seizure
Some medical emergencies can turn a strong swimmer into a non-swimmer immediately, in some cases
the casualty will try and continue to swim or may display abnormal actions.
Remember - if a swimmer is not acting normally or you are in any doubt as to their actions,
you must act immediately to investigate
Unconscious casualty
Unconsciousness may be the result of drowning, injury, collision with another swimmer or part of the
pool, or as a result of a developing medical emergency. An unconscious casualty would definitely be
unresponsive and unable to help themselves.
It is difficult to detail how an unconscious casualty will appear, studies of past incidents have shown that
there are many ways an unconscious casualty could look. The list below are examples, but lifeguards
should be aware that any behaviour or position of a casualty that is not normal must be investigated
immediately:
• Face down with arms and legs hanging limply
• Be totally limp in the water
• At any point from the surface of the pool and the bottom
• Some casualties may appear to make slight movements, for example seizure type actions
• In some cases, a swimmer may remain in the same body position as before they became
unconscious, such as a swimming position or resting at the pool edge/lane rope
NPLQ Generation 9
1.5 Lifeguard entries
It is important to enter the water safely on all occasions. There are risks associated when diving or jumping
into water, either by hitting the bottom of the pool with your head or upper body, or by jumping into shallow
water and injuring your ankles, feet, knees, hips or back as the force can travel up your body when you
land. You must also consider other swimmers as there is always a risk of colliding and injuring yourself,
them or both of you.
Always follow the pools NOP and in particular, diving rules.
Regular practice in entering the water during this course and through regular ongoing training will ensure
that when you respond in an emergency, your automatic response will be safe. This should include getting
on and off a high chair in an emergency.
In a crowded pool where a casualty may be obscured from view (however briefly) by other swimmers, it is
important that you try not to lose sight of the casualty.
For your safety and to aid in the rescue, always enter the water with a torpedo buoy.
1.5.1 Slide-in Entry

A lifeguard can lower themselves in over the side of the pool quickly and safely while maintaining sight

of the casualty. When performing a slide-in entry, slightly bend your knees to avoid any jolt if and when
contact is made with the pool floor.
This technique can be used in shallow or deep water and may be useful where there is a drop into the
water from the edge of the pool. It is also a good technique to use where the pool is busy or during wave
sessions where there could be variations in the depth of water.
1.5.2 Step or Walk-in Entry

Where the water is extremely shallow, it may be appropriate to simply step or walk into the water; for
example in a leisure pool, which may be a few inches deep and have a gradual slope.
103
1.5.3 Straddle Entry

This technique allows you to keep the casualty in view during the rescue. When performing a straddle entry
you should aim to keep your head out of the water and keep sight of the casualty. A straddle entry can also
be performed holding a torpedo buoy.
It is relatively slow and is not appropriate in a very crowded pool or from a height of greater than one metre
above the water.
The key points of a straddle entry are:
• Fix your eyes on the casualty and keep your chin up
• Step out from a standing position
• Lean slightly forward
• Extend one leg forward and the other backward with your knees slightly bent
• Extend your arms sideways and slightly forward, palms downwards
• On entering the water, close your legs together in a scissors action and press down with the arms
• Your arm and leg action will help you to keep your head above water
If holding a torpedo buoy:

• Hold the buoy across your chest firmly with the ends under your arms
• Keep hold of the strap to prevent it getting tangled in your arms or legs
1.5.4 Shallow Dive

This is the fastest way to get into the pool and reach the casualty. The downside is you lose sight of the
casualty during the entry.
• Never dive into shallow water or water less than 1.5 metres deep
• Follow the pool’s diving safety rules at all times
• Obey ‘No Diving’ signs
• Check the water depth before diving
• Never dive where it is not possible to see the bottom, such as in the turbulent water found in a wave
area or leisure pools
The key points of a shallow dive are:

• Ensure you have a secure standing position on the side
• Look down and forward in the direction of travel
• Bend your knees
• Push off as far as possible out over the water and at the same time throw your arms forward
• Enter with your body almost horizontal, extending your arms and legs
• Keep your head between your arms
• Keep your body straight and streamlined
• After entry, raise your head, surface and swim to the casualty
NPLQ Generation 9
1.5.5 Diving with a Torpedo Buoy
If wearing a torpedo buoy, throw the buoy into the pool as you dive (slightly to your side) ensuring it cannot
catch or snag on the pool edge or side as you dive.

1.6 Personal safety during rescue
The RLSS UK recommends that lifeguards enter the water with a torpedo buoy when carrying out an in-
water rescue wherever suitable. With this piece of rescue equipment and through your training, the use of
this rescue aid reduces the likelihood of needing to use the escapes detailed below.
1.6.1 Defensive Block with Torpedo Buoy

If a casualty makes a lunge or grasp towards you, use the torpedo buoy to block the casualty from grabbing
hold of you directly. The casualty will then automatically grasp the torpedo buoy giving them immediate
support in the water. This may help calm the casualty down and ensure your own safety.
105
The principles of a defensive block are:

• Using both hands, push the torpedo buoy into the casualty’s chest
• The casualty will grasp the torpedo buoy
• Distance yourself from the casualty by holding the strap
• Communicate and reassure the casualty
• Tow to a safe point of support
1.6.2 General Principles of Escape

(Where no rescue aid is available – this should not happen in a swimming pool environment!)
If you need to escape a casualty’s grasp, follow the general principles:

• Hold your breath
• Tuck you chin into your chest to protect your throat
• Allow yourself to submerge
• If the casualty does not let go, push against their body with your arms or legs
• Try and release the casualty’s grip
• Once you are free from the casualty move to a safe distance
• Assess situation and rescue appropriately using team support
Where a lifeguard approaches a casualty with a torpedo buoy in front of them, the casualty will grab the
rescue aid instead of them.
1.6.3 Separating Multiple Casualties

In the extremely unlikely event that torpedo buoys are
not available and you enter the water without one,
you must separate two casualties who are clinging to
one another in the water.
The procedure is:
• Grasp the uppermost casualty under the armpits
from behind
• Force both casualties under the water
• Place your legs around the first casualty and
your feet against the hips and thighs of the
second casualty
• Maintain a grip on the first casualty’s body
• Straighten your legs to force the two casualties
apart
1.7 Rescue Equipment

The pool operator will decide on the most appropriate rescue equipment for the type of pool, session and
circumstances, however the torpedo buoy has been found to be one of the most versatile pieces of rescue
equipment.
There are many forms of rescue equipment including:
• Torpedo buoys (preferably of the flexible type without metal fastenings) for reaching, throwing, wading
and swimming with
• Throwbags (either wall-mounted or carried by lifeguards)
• Buoyant throwing devices
• Reaching poles, specifically designed for the purpose (not broom handles)
The RLSS UK does not recommend the use of coiled ropes.
NPLQ Generation 9
1.7.1 Torpedo Buoy
A torpedo buoy is a soft, flexible, buoyant tube with towing straps and clips.
Holding the torpedo buoy appropriately

Where possible and safe to do so, the lifeguard should stand or sit with a rescue aid. This ensures the
lifeguard can react immediately and reduces delay in choosing a rescue aid, and negates the need for the
lifeguard to turn their back to the pool to retrieve the torpedo buoy.
The torpedo buoy can be:
• Held with the strap coiled
• Worn with the strap over their head and across their chest
• Worn with the strap over one shoulder
If the torpedo buoy is worn over their head and across their chest, the lifeguard should be cautious when
approaching a panicking casualty and be prepared to unclip the torpedo buoy if they were being pulled by
the casualty.
RESCUE & EMERGENCY ACTION PLAN

SECTION 2: INTERVENTION,
Using a torpedo buoy
Entering the water
Enter the water with the strap over the head and the torpedo buoy to your side as it will follow behind you
as you move or swim away. Be careful to keep the strap clear of your legs and other poolside equipment
such as pool steps.
In deeper water, if using straddle entry, hold the torpedo buoy across your chest firmly with the ends under
your arms and the remainder of the strap in your hands as you enter the water.
Swimming
Place the strap over your head and make sure the trailing strap does not get tangled between your legs.
1.7.2 Reaching Poles

There are certain circumstances where a reach pole is suitable and this will be identified by the pool
operator, however you will find that in most cases a torpedo buoy can fulfil the same role. The sequence
for using a reach pole is the same as the reaching rescue sequence detailed earlier in this element.
107
1.7.3 Throw Bags

To use, open the mouth of the bag wide and hold the loop of the rope in one hand. Hold the neck of the
bag with your throwing hand. Stand back from the pool edge and throw the bag underarm, keeping your
throwing arm straight.
A typical sequence for a throw bag might be:
1. Alert team members
2. Open the bag and hold the end of the rope
3. Throw the bag, aiming to land just beyond the casualty to avoid hitting them
4. Tell them to hold the rope securely
5. Tell them to keep looking at you and to kick their legs
6. Pull them carefully to a position of safety
7. Help them out of the water
1.8 Types of Rescues

There are three types of rescue in a swimming pool:
• Poolside based rescues
• In-water rescues
• Special equipment rescues
Remember, for all types of emergencies the lifeguard walks briskly and should not run, especially on poolside.
1.8.1 Poolside Based Rescues

Shout and signal
This can only be used when the casualty is responsive and able to help themselves. They may respond to
simple instructions and signals with the result that they can be guided to safety and then helped out of the
water.
When and where?

Use a shout and signal rescue when a casualty is conscious, close to the edge of the pool and able to
respond to instructions.
A typical sequence might be:
2. Attract the attention of the casualty by shouting and signalling
3. Give clear, loud, firm but short instructions e.g. “grab hold of the side” or “kick your legs”
4. Use hand signals and verbal instruction to direct the casualty the nearest point of safety
5. Help the casualty out of the water if necessary
NPLQ Generation 9
Reaching and throwing rescues
Reaching and throwing rescues are extremely effective where a casualty is within easy reaching distance
of the rescue aid. Where the lifeguard is already holding a torpedo buoy the time to respond and rescue
a casualty is reduced.
For both types of rescue remember:
• A low-down crouching position or lying flat on poolside will assist you while pulling the casualty in and
reduce the likelihood of you being pulled into the water
• If a casualty is out of reach, entry into the water with a rescue aid may be the fastest and most
effective rescue for the casualty

Reaching rescues
Reaching rescues can be carried out with various items, including torpedo buoys and reaching poles. A
typical sequence might be:
2. Get yourself firmly fixed in a low position on the poolside
3. Get a firm grip on the torpedo buoy and reach out with it
4. Instruct the casualty to take hold of the torpedo buoy
5. When they have a firm grip, pull them to a position of safety
6. Help the casualty out of the water, if necessary
When using a torpedo buoy, push it directly towards the casualty while keeping hold of the strap to pull
them to a position of safety.
109
Throwing rescues
A low down crouching position or lying flat on poolside will assist you while pulling the casualty in and reduce
the likelihood of you being pulled into the water
You can also use a torpedo buoy for a throwing rescue. The shoulder strap can be unclipped to provide a
longer range, ensure you have a firm hold of the strap.
If a casualty is out of reach, entry into the water with a rescue aid may be the fastest and most effective
rescue for the casualty.
1.8.2 In-Water Rescues

An in-water rescue may sometimes be the quickest way to rescue and support a casualty. For all in-water
rescues remember to enter the water safely.
When approaching a casualty make contact by shouting or speaking clearly and loudly to give simple
instructions such as:
• Keep your hands in the water
• Kick your legs
• Stand up
• Grab hold of the lane rope
• Look at me
• Grab hold of the rescue aid
NPLQ Generation 9
Wading rescues
Where a casualty is in shallow water and in your standing depth, a wading rescue can be used. Enter the
water safely as near to the casualty as possible. You must also know the water depths you are entering to
ensure the wading rescue is effective.
You can support the casualty yourself directly, but in many cases, a torpedo buoy may be more
appropriate and enable you to reach the casualty sooner. Once the casualty is suitably supported either by
you or the torpedo buoy you can guide the casualty to safe point of support.

Non-contact tow (using torpedo buoy)
Tows using torpedo buoy where you do not have direct contact with the casualty.
A typical non-contact tow sequence may be:
2. Enter the water safely
3. When close to the casualty move the shoulder strap over your head so it is only over one shoulder
and before you are within the casualty’s reach
4. Reach out with the torpedo buoy, hold it firmly
5. Instruct the casualty grab hold of the torpedo buoy
6. Hold the torpedo buoy or the extension of the strap to keep a safe distance if the casualty is
panicking and attempting to grab you
7. Tow the casualty carefully to a safe point of support The casualty can be either on their front or back
depending on which position they find most secure
8. Help the casualty out of the water, if necessary
111
1.8.3 Contact Tows

An extended arm tow gives you direct contact with casualty and this tow is suitable if the casualty is
unconscious as it will maintain the casualty’s airway.
Extended arm tow

1. Take hold of the casualty’s chin by cupping it in the palm of your hand (keep clear of their throat
and mouth)
2. Keep your arm straight by locking your elbow
3. Keep your straight arm in line with the casualty
4. Tow casualty using sidestroke or lifesaving backstroke
5. Use your free arm to pull through the water
6. Observe the casualty and watch the direction you are swimming in
1.8.4 Support Tows

Support tows are also contact tows and are used to keep the casualty’s head clear of the water. These
tows are designed for responsive casualties. They give support but still allow the casualty free movement
of their head and arms. The casualty’s elevated position may also reduce their panic.
Support tows are most effective over short distances.
NPLQ Generation 9
Arm support tow
To perform an arm support tow:
1. Grasp the underside of the casualty’s
upper arm (right arm to casualty’s left arm
or left arm to casualty’s right arm)
2. Position your forearm across the
casualty’s back to support
3. Apply gentle lift across the casualty’s
shoulders and arm to ensure their head
stays clear of the water
4. Swim using sidestroke
5. Observe the casualty and watch the
direction you are swimming in
Hip support tow

The hip support tow is particularly useful with a
panicking casualty.
To perform a hip support tow:

1. Approach the casualty from the rear
2. Dip below the water surface as you get
close to them
3. Put your arm under the casualty’s arm
and grasp them around the waist
4. Support them with your upper hip to
elevate their position
6. Observe the casualty and watch the
direction you are swimming
Depending on the casualty’s size, you may be underwater and may need to surface to breathe.
Under shoulder support tow

This is an alternative to the hip support and can
be used for larger casualties.
To perform an under shoulder support tow:
1. Approach the casualty from the rear (in
most cases it may be appropriate to
approach from underwater)
2. Grasp the casualty round the chest and
place your shoulder under their armpit
3. Keep the side of your face close to the
casualty’s back
5. Watch the direction of travel
Depending on the casualty’s size, you may be underwater and may need to surface to breathe.
113
1.9 RESCuE SkILLS

Lifeguards will need the following rescue skills to enable them to respond appropriately in an emergency.
1.9.1 Turning Unconscious Casualty on the Surface of the Pool

Obviously, immediate intervention is essential for unconscious casualties.
If the casualty is on the pool surface, turn them immediately to a face up position.
To turn an unconscious casualty:

1. Push one shoulder down and raise the other
shoulder in one continuous movement
2. Roll their body into a face up position
3. Support their back and chin as they move
into a towing position
1.9.2 Recovering Submerged Casualties

You need to be able to swim underwater and dive to the deepest part of the pool you work at to recover a
casualty submerged or lying on the bottom.
1.9.3 Feet First Surface Dive

2. Swim to a point above the submerged
casualty
3. Tread water then use a strong breaststroke
kick or egg beater kick and press downwards
with your hands to raise your body out of the
water
4. Keep your legs together and your arms by
your side
5. As your head goes under, sweep your arms
upwards
6. Once your feet touch the bottom, ‘tuck’ or
‘pike’ your body
7. Use both hands to hold the casualty under
the armpits, then push off from the bottom of
the pool, keeping hold of the casualty
NPLQ Generation 9
1.9.4 Head First Surface Dive
2. Flex at the waist/hips and reach your hands down towards the pool floor
3. Keep your head between your arms
4. As your upper body descends lift your legs out of the water to increase the downwards force
5. Use your arms to help pull you through the water in a breaststroke action
6. Use both hands to hold the casualty under the armpits, then push off from the bottom of the
pool, keeping hold of the casualty

1.9.5 Deep Dive and Rescue
You can use a dive from poolside to quickly reach the casualty who is submerged in deep water or on the
bottom of the pool. This should only be carried out when the water is no less than two metres, remember to
always follow the diving rules for the particular pool where you work.
Make sure there are no other pool users in the way.
You will need to dive at a steep angle to reach the pool bottom in one movement and in some cases where
the pool is very deep you may need to swim underwater.
115
The key points of a deep dive and rescue are:

1. Ensure you have a secure standing position on the side
2. Look down and forward in the direction of travel
3. Bend your knees
4. Push off and throw your arms forward
5. Enter with your body at an angle directed towards the casualty, extending your arms and legs
6. Keep your body straight and streamlined
7. Use both hands to hold the casualty under the armpits, then push off from the bottom of the pool,
keeping hold of the casualty
8. Kick your legs and use your free arm to swim to the surface
Keep visual contact with the casualty throughout the entry and approach underwater.
1.9.6 Swimming Underwater

It is important that you can swim underwater to recover casualties; underwater breaststroke is one of the
most commonly used methods to use underwater.
It is worth remembering that the pressure of water on your body increases with depth. Diving or swimming
below 1.5 metres can cause pain and damage to the middle ear, eardrums and sinuses.
The pressure can be equalised on the ear and sinuses by:
• Holding your nose and gently blowing out against your closed nostrils
• Breathing out through your nose
• Swallowing
• Moving your jaw as if chewing gum
If you are susceptible to ear, nose and throat conditions, take advice from your doctor and inform employer
as this could impact on your ability to perform a rescue in the pool in which you work.
1.9.7 Rescuing Multiple Casualties

Developing emergencies involving more than one casualty are not uncommon, particularly in crowded
swimming situations or where a group of swimmers are close to each other. Where a swimmer starts to
panic, they often grab hold of another swimmer to try and keep themselves above the water, putting both
of them in danger.
Look out for two (or sometimes more) swimmers very close together showing signs of panic and
distress. It may appear that one swimmer is using the other to try and keep their head above the water,
therefore pushing the other under.
A non-swimmer would grab a passing swimmer without hesitation to try and climb out of the water so they
can keep their head above water to breath.
Multiple rescues often need the support of the whole lifeguard team and it may be necessary for more
than one lifeguard to enter the water. In a multiple rescue, the use of a buoyant device such as a torpedo
buoy is strongly recommended and this will prove invaluable for support of the casualties and minimise the
risk to the lifeguard.
NPLQ Generation 9
When and where
It may not always be necessary to separate the casualties when rescuing them. They can often be towed
together to a point of support as they can both use the torpedo buoy for support.
Towing two separated casualties is a difficult task for a single lifeguard and it is distressing for the
casualties particularly without a torpedo buoy. It would only be suitable with co-operative casualties. If two
casualties are towed together to a deep-water point of support, it is essential that the weaker swimmer is
supported first and the other immediately after.
If possible give a torpedo buoy to the stronger casualty for support, then tow the other casualty to safety.
As we’ve seen, using a torpedo buoy is one of the quickest and safest ways to support and rescue
multiple casualties. By pushing the torpedo buoy towards the casualties, in some cases, this can bring the
emergency under control and reduce the panic of the swimmers in trouble.

117
1.10 Casualty recovery and exits from

the water
Following a rescue it is important that casualties are helped out of the water and moved to a safe place
(wherever possible away from the poolside) for first aid and recovery.
It is essential that care is taken to ensure you do not injure yourself or the casualty during any manual
lift. The pool operator will have risk assessed manual handling tasks and lifting casualties out of the pool
during an emergency or during training.
RLSS UK does not approve of unassisted (on your own) lifting during training or in a rescue
emergency.
1.10.1 Rescue from Beach or Shallow Water Area

Assisted walk out
An assisted walk out is appropriate when casualties are exhausted or distressed but can walk with help.
After letting the casualty rest in shallow water, slide your head under their armpit, put your arm around
their waist and shoulder with their arm across your shoulder and walk the casualty to a point of safety on
poolside. If the casualty is heavy, a second lifeguard should assist from the other side.
Pull ashore
This can be used where the pool bottom slopes gently, such as beach areas, and is particularly appropriate
if a casualty cannot help themselves (unresponsive casualty).
Bring the casualty to waist depth and with assistance from another lifeguard, walk backwards with your
back straight, with each lifeguard supporting the casualty under the armpits and holding their wrists. Walk
the casualty to a point of safety (take care whilst walking backwards).
1.10.2 Stirrup Lift

This can be used to help a casualty climb out of
the pool and it is often used to land casualties from
a support position in the water.
To help someone out of the water:
1. Move to a position behind them
2. Reach down and cup one hand under the
casualty’s foot or knee, right hand to right
foot or left to left
3. Get a firm grip of the poolside with your
other hand
4. Using a lift instruct the casualty to climb out
of the water and to move away from the edge
NPLQ Generation 9
1.10.3 Assisted Lift
There are several factors affecting how easily casualties can be lifted from the water. One is the distance
between the surface of the water and the top edge of the pool, known as the freeboard. The design of
poolside troughs or rails may also make lifting more difficult. If the casualty is conscious and able to help
themselves, it may be helpful to move to shallow water so the lifeguard assisting them out of the water is
able to stand firmly on the pool floor.
It is important to remain fit and healthy as a lifeguard for many reasons and one of them is to reduce the
likelihood of injury when lifting, remember this must go hand in hand with good lifting techniques detailed
below.
You may need to start rescue breathing in the water until assistance arrives to remove the casualty from
the water (pic A). See CPR section.
rescue & emergency actIon PLan

SECTION 2: InterventIon,
A
Lifting safely
• Only lift the casualty if it is absolutely necessary, if they can walk or climb out let them
• Make a firm base with your feet, they should be about a shoulder width apart
• Lift using your legs, not with your back
• Keep the casualty as close to your body as possible
• If you need to turn, move your feet, do not twist your back
This technique is used to land casualties from water and two or more lifeguards are needed.
Once lifeguards are ready on the poolside to assist one of them should take charge of the lift.
The rescuing lifeguard (lifeguard 1) may remain in the water and can assist by supporting and lifting the
casualty’s hips.
119
The following sequence of photographs demonstrates the stages of the assisted lift.
Supporting the casualty

Lifeguard 1 Place your arms, one at a time, under their armpits and take a firm grip of the side of the pool.
Support their head by resting it on one of your shoulders and make sure their airway is clear
(pic B)
Lifeguard 2 Place the casualty’s hands on poolside. Kneel down with one knee in front of the casualty.
Hold the casualty’s wrists firmly and in some cases, wrists and arms to provide additional
support (pic B)
Lifeguards on poolside – Take hold of the casualty’s wrist and arm (pic C)
B C
Lifting the casualty out of the water

Lifeguard team On an agreed command, lift the casualty out of the water until the hips or waist are level
with the top of the pool edge (pic D). For small, light casualties you may be able to lift until
the casualty’s thigh is level with the top of the pool edge
One lifeguard should take care of the casualty’s head throughout the lift to ensure it does
not flop forward and hit the poolside (pic E)
D E
NPLQ Generation 9
Lifeguard team Bend the casualty at the waist and gently lower their torso to the floor, keeping their head
well supported. Do not drag the casualty across the pool edge (pic F)
Lifeguard team Keep the casualty’s arms straight and rest their head on their upper arms to protect their
face during turning (pic G)
F G
Turning the casualty parallel to poolside

Lifeguard team Lift the casualty’s legs and move them round to lie parallel to the poolside. Both legs can
usually be lifted together, however for heavy casualties, one leg at a time may be safer (pic
H, I and J)
H I J
Lifeguard team In order to assess the casualty’s breathing, give CPR, first aid or aftercare the casualty will
need to be turned onto their back (pic K, L and M).
This is explained in Section 3; Turning a casualty onto their back.
K L M
The rescue board and PXB (which is covered later in this section) can also be used to safely remove a
conscious injured casualty from the water, where other methods may potentially increase the risk of further
injury. For example, if a swimmer has a suspected broken leg, then the rescue board or PXB would be a
safe and effective method of removing the casualty from the pool.
If the lift is difficult, you should stop, reassess and get more lifeguards to assist. In such cases, you will
need to continue to support the casualty in the water until there are enough lifeguards available to help with
the recovery.
If casualties have to be landed over the edge of the pool, the lift should be one smooth movement
to reduce injury to yourself or the casualty. Do not bounce the casualty.
121
1.11 Rescue Pathway

In an emergency there are many things that need to be considered.
Below is a list of actions that may need to be carried out depending on the emergency. Think of a pool
related incident and using the points below arrange them in a logical order to fit the given scenario.
rescue pathway
• Call 999/112 • ________________________________________________________
• Replenish first aid box • ________________________________________________________
• Perform a rescue • ________________________________________________________
• Take casualty to a quiet, safe area • ________________________________________________________
• Recognise an emergency/the early signs of • ________________________________________________________

an emergency developing
• ________________________________________________________
• Alert team members
• ________________________________________________________
• Collect first aid kit
• ________________________________________________________
• Implement the Emergency Action Plan
• ________________________________________________________
• Use backup staff to replace lifeguards
• ________________________________________________________
• Staff meeting to debrief
• Bring casualty to a point of support • ________________________________________________________
• Administer first aid • ________________________________________________________
• Complete accident/incident report form • ________________________________________________________
• Clean poolside where blood is present • ________________________________________________________
• Enter the water safely • ________________________________________________________
• Assist casualty from the water • ________________________________________________________
• Instruct swimmers to exit the water • ________________________________________________________
NPLQ Generation 9
1. Give 4 examples of when a lifeguard may need to perform a rescue
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Describe each of the following:
i) Responsive casualty ___________________________________________________________________________________________
ii) Unresponsive casualty ________________________________________________________________________________________

3. Give 2 examples of medical emergencies that could impact on a swimmer’s ability

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. When might a lifeguard need to use a defensive block?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. How would you separate multiple casualties?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. What rescue equipment should a lifeguard use?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. Why is it important for lifeguards to enter the water with a torpedo buoy?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
8. When would you use a shout and signal rescue?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
9. When and why would you use an extended arm tow?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
10. Give 2 ways you can recover a casualty from the water?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
123
ELEMENT 2 – Rescue of a casualty with
a suspected spinal injury
What we will cover
• Basic anatomy of the spine
• Identifying a casualty
• Managing the casualty in the water
• Casualty recovery
• Using specialist rescue equipment
The EAP must identify the arrangements for the

management of this type of injury at each individual
pool facility and the use of a rescue board or PXB.
2.0 The spine and spinal cord

Before we start, you need to have a basic understanding of the anatomy of the spine as this will help you
to understand how to identify a possible injury, the importance of immobilisation, team work and careful
casualty handling in the event of an accident.
2.0.1 The Spine

The spine is a column of 33 irregular shaped bones called vertebrae. It supports the skull and the ribs are
attached to it. In between the vertebrae are cartilage discs which:
• Allow limited movement
• Prevent friction
• Act as shock absorbers
Intervertebral Disc
Spinal Cord
Vertebral Body
NPLQ Generation 9
2.0.2 The Spinal Cord and the Nervous System
The spinal cord runs down the centre of the spinal column. It links the brain and the nerves supplying the
trunk and the limbs. It is through the cord that the brain sends signals to control movement throughout the
body, from the simple action of breathing in and out to controlling all major muscles and moving limbs.
When the spine is injured, depending on the severity, some of these functions are affected and often result
in the casualty suffering paralysis.
The higher the spinal injury, the more muscles become paralysed

2.1 RECOGNISING a POTENTIaL SPINaL INJuRy

History
As a lifeguard you may witness an accident where a casualty has sustained an injury from severe force or
blow to their spine, examples of either, within a swimming pool environment, are detailed below:
Severe impact:
• Diving and hitting the pool bottom, side of pool or swimmer
• Collision with other swimmer e.g. acrobatics, equipment use
• Some equipment may increase the likelihood of a spinal injury due to the potential increase of the
forces involved with each piece of specific equipment:
Diving boards or platform
Flume
Inflatable
125
ELEMENT 2 – rescue of a casualty with a suspected spinal injury
History is key when identifying a casualty with a suspected spinal injury, as the cause of the accident may
indicate the likelihood of a spinal injury particularly where large forces are involved as indicated above.
Whether you have an understanding of the casualty history or not, look for symptoms and signs.
Symptoms
• Lack of movement/power in one or more limbs
• Disorientation or bewilderment
• Numbness or tingling in the limbs
• Pain in the neck or back
Signs
• Casualty floating face down in the water, unable to turn over (not necessarily unconscious)
• Bruising or swelling at impact area of head, neck or spine
• Deformity or irregularity of the spine
• Loss of muscle control
• Unconsciousness
2.2 Principles of casualty management

Because most accidents happen unexpectedly, it is often impossible to know exactly what happened, the
nature of the injury and any subsequent damage to the spine. It is important to treat and follow the basic
principles below:
Stabilising the head, neck and spine

As mentioned before, the higher the spinal injury the more of the body can potentially be paralysed.
Therefore the first action must be to stabilise the head. Maintain the casualty in the position in which you
found them (if it is safe to do so). Where the casualty is lying down support the head in a neutral position,
keeping the head, neck and spine aligned.
Maintaining a horizontal position

When rescuing and recovering a casualty with a suspected spinal injury from the water, you must make sure
the casualty is kept in a horizontal position and all movement is minimised and carried out with great care.
Due to the above, an assisted lift would not be appropriate and could cause further damage to the
spine as it is difficult to keep the spine straight and the head immobilised. Due to this, a horizontal lifting
technique is recommended with or without the use of a rescue board or PXB.
2.3 Incident management priorities

The first priority of the lifeguard is to save life. If face down, clearly the casualty needs to be turned face
up so they can breathe; where the casualty is deemed unconscious by not responding to “Are you all
right?” you would need to remove the casualty from the water immediately so the primary survey can be
completed on poolside.
It is important to remember that the casualty’s airway takes priority over injury. Ultimately your decision must
be based on the priority of saving life. There are three key priorities for lifeguards to follow:
• Save life
• Stabilise the casualty’s head, neck and spine
• Maintain their horizontal position
NPLQ Generation 9
2.4 Rescue techniques
Rescue under such circumstances is based on the principle of keeping the casualty’s head in a stable
position and the stabilisation of the whole spine.
Two techniques can be used depending on the circumstances these are called:
• Vice grip
• Head splint
It is unusual for a casualty to be discovered floating face up. The body’s natural centre of gravity normally
turns a casualty into a face down position.
As always, your first priority is to turn them face up so they can breathe; your second and third priorities
can be met by using one of the two approved rescue techniques. The descriptions refer to face down
casualties, however it would be possible to apply the vice grip or head splint with the casualty in the face
up position if required.
As with all rescues, as soon as spinal injury is suspected, the EAP should be implemented. At the very
least, this should make sure the surrounding water area is cleared, waves and other features are stopped,
and support lifeguards and other staff report to the poolside.

2.4.1 Vice Grip - Rescue from water, out of a comfortable standing depth
This technique is used to secure the head, neck and spine of the casualty between a lifeguard’s hands and
forearms, as if in the jaws of a vice.
Approach
1. Enter the water carefully minimising as far as possible any further movement
2. Approach the casualty from one side
3. Approach by swimming head up and as you get closer to the casualty, minimise splashing and
water disturbance
Once you have reached the casualty you must stabilise the head, neck and spine
• Gently reach under the casualty, ensuring your arm goes around their near arm
• Place your forearm along the line of their breastbone,
supporting the casualty’s face just above the chin,
securely placing your thumb and fingers in a Y-shape
either side of their jaw
• Place your other forearm in the same position along
their spine Your fingers should be outstretched on the
back of their head, clamping it securely from behind
• Keep your fingers, hands, wrists and elbows rigid;
your elbows and forearms should be gently but firmly
pressed together
• Keep the casualty close to your body
127
Turning the casualty face up

• Once secured in the vice grip, begin to gently roll the casualty by sliding under the water.
• Continue to roll the casualty until they are face up on the surface of the water
• When turning someone in water out of standing depth, kick hard to make sure they are not pulled
under the water, whilst minimising water turbulence
If you are able to, a forward motion during the turn may help to make the turn smooth and move the
casualty’s body into a horizontal position earlier.
Turning is made very much easier if the casualty is rolled at the surface of the water; lifting the casualty
during the turn increases the potential for further injury.
Are you all right?

Once the casualty is face up you should check the response of the casualty by asking “Are you all right?”.
If the casualty is not responsive when the lifeguard asks “Are you all right?” they should be
removed quickly from the water, taking care to limit movement of the head and neck as much as
possible. The priority, however, is to get the casualty to a position where breathing can be assessed
fully and CPR started if required.
Returning to shallow water

When the casualty is face up, maintain the vice grip while you tow them back to a point of support in shallow
water. Lifeguards may use side stroke leg kick, breast stroke, flutter kick or egg beater leg kick (the latter is
most effective), to trawl the casualty horizontally through the water.
Remember that the casualty could be facing in any direction, meaning that once you have turned the
casualty face up you may need to trawl them towards the shallow end, in an arc (where possible) to help
maintain the head, neck and spine in a straight line.
As you approach a point where standing is easier, it is essential that the vice grip and horizontal position
are maintained, no matter how uncomfortable this may be for you.
NPLQ Generation 9
2.4.2 Head Splint - Rescue from shallow water
The head splint can be used in a range of water depths up to about lifeguard’s chest depth and is simple
to apply.
Approach
• Slide into the water
• Approach the casualty from the side, and stop when in a position next to their shoulders
Stabilise the head and neck

• Gently grasp the casualty’s arms
• Placing your hands midway between the casualty’s elbows and shoulders
• Gently move their arms in a smooth sweeping action to a position next to the ears
• Carefully squeeze their arms against their head to splint the head between both arms to prevent any
movement
• Position your thumbs on the back of their head, maintaining the pressure on the arms

Turning the casualty face up
• Gently roll the casualty towards you by pushing the arm nearest to you downwards and pulling on the
arm furthest away from you towards you (avoid twisting the casualty)
• Continue to roll the casualty in one smooth action until they are face up
A forward motion during the turn may help to move the casualty’s body into a horizontal position.
• Once the casualty is face up, lifeguard 1 maintains the pressure on their arms and support the back
of their head on their submerged forearm. Do not release the pressure on their arms until you get
extra help
- once the casualty is face up you should check the response of the casualty by asking “Are you all right?”
If the casualty is not responsive when the lifeguard asks “Are you all right?” they should be
removed quickly from the water, taking care to limit movement of the head and neck as much as
possible. The priority, however, is to get the casualty to a position where breathing can be assessed
fully and CPR started if required.
129
Secure the casualty

Lifeguard 1 Applies the head splint turn then supports near the shoulders and the upper part of
the back after lifeguard 2 supports the head and reassures the casualty
Lifeguard 2 Supports head, thumb above ears, fingers below
Lifeguard 3 Supports the lower back and upper thigh on their arms palms down
Lifeguard 4 Carefully and gently moves the casualty’s arms to the side of their body when lifeguards 2
and 3 are in position then moves to support the lower legs palms down or prepares and
applies the rescue board if available
Additional support can be applied in exactly the same way as for the vice grip, by lifeguard 2 at the head
sliding hands between the casualty’s raised arms and head.
Lifeguard 2 supports head, thumb above ears, fingers below.
2
1 1 2
The arms may be carefully and gently moved to the side of the casualty’s body by lifeguard 4 once the body
is supported by lifeguards 1, 2 and 3. Lifeguard 1 can continue to reassure the casualty.
3 1 3
4 4
2
3 3
4 4
NPLQ Generation 9
2.4.3 Stabilisation in Shallow Water
1 2
3
4

Once stabilised in this position, the casualty is ready to be removed from the water. This must be done as
quickly as possible to prevent the onset of hypothermia and enable further treatment of their condition.
131
2.5 REMOVAL OF A CASUALTY WITH A SUSPECTED

SPINAL INJURY FROM THE WATER
2.5.1 Removal of a Casualty using a Rescue Board
A rescue board provides quick, safe and easy means of recovering a casualty with suspected spinal
injuries from the swimming pool to poolside. The rescue board serves to immobilise a casualty within the
water, helping to prevent secondary injury to the spinal cord prior to recovery on the poolside.
The Ferno Aquaboard is a rigid, buoyant rescue board designed in collaboration with RLSS UK to recover
a casualty from a pool.
The rescue board includes the following unique features:

• Five body and Leg Straps to hold a casualty to the board, with colour coded buckles for ease of
identification and accurate application. The strapping system should allow sufficient adjustment for a
wide range of sizes of casualty.
• Lightweight Head Restraint with three retaining straps, to secure a casualty’s head in a stable, neutral
position.
• As the board is X-Ray Translucent, the patient can remain on the board throughout X-Ray procedures
The rescue board can be used to rescue casualties with spinal injuries or other conditions which prevent
them being assisted from the water using the other techniques identified throughout this qualification.
The practicalities of using a rescue board should be risk assessed by the pool operator to ensure the pool
dimensions and environments are suitable.
It is essential that pool operators have at least two of the rescue team trained in the RLSS UK National
Pool Lifeguard Qualification with rescue board, and two additional people must be trained to support the
lifeguards to use the rescue board.
Rescue board storage

The rescue board will be stored at a point specified within the centre’s NOP. The rescue board must be
easily accessible. Some pools will specify where the rescue board can be extracted from the water.
NPLQ Generation 9
Recovery from the water using a rescue board
Response Check
Lifeguard 1 Implement the EAP
Apply the vice grip and trawl the casualty to shallow water
Check the casualty’s response by asking loudly “Are you all right?”
The conscious state will determine the method used to extract the casualty from the water
Lifeguard 2 Support the head with their thumb above the ear and fingers below (pic A)
Lifeguard 3 Support the lower back and upper thigh on their arms, with their palms facing down (pic A)
Lifeguard 1 Remove grip to support under the shoulders and upper back, with their palms facing own (pic B
and C)
2 2 2
1 1 1
3 3 3

A B C
Lifeguard 4 Prepare the rescue board on poolside ensuring the straps and head restraint are loosened,
ready for use
Positioning the rescue board

Lifeguard 4 Position the rescue board alongside the casualty and align the head markings on the board
with the casualty’s head (lifeguard 1 can assist lifeguard 4 by checking alignment)
Ensure the straps nearest to the casualty are under the rescue board to prevent them getting
tangled (pic D)
Tip the board up onto its edge nearest the casualty until it is at a right angle with the water
(pic E)
4 4
1
D E
Lifeguard 4 Push the board down into the water and allow it to float up underneath the casualty
(pic F and G)
With the casualty still supported by the team, minor adjustments can be made to the
alignment of the board
Provide support under the board by grasping it firmly with both arms and palms facing
upwards (pic H)
4 4 4
F G H
133
When correct alignment has been achieved:

2
Lifeguard 3 Slides their arms out gently and grasps the
underneath of the board with their palms up to
provide support under the thigh and lower back 4
1
Lifeguard 1 Slides their arms out gently and grasps the
underneath of the board with their palms up to
provide support under the shoulders and upper back
Lifeguard 3 Lifeguard 3 who was supporting the lower back and
upper thigh can move to the foot end of the board
and take hold of it (pic I)
Lifeguard 2 Maintain support of the casualty’s head and reassure
the casualty throughout 3
* if there is fifth person supporting the lower limbs they should slide
their hands out carefully before Lifeguard 3, then move to the foot end
of the board and take hold of it
Securing the casualty

Lifeguard 4 Apply and gently tighten the
chest strap (Ferno Aquaboard 4
– green buckle), securing the
casualty to the board (pic J)
Lifeguard 3 Once the chest strap is secure,
push down gently to bring the
rescue board to the casualty’s
head. This should only be done if
necessary
* if there is fifth person at the foot end of the board

they will carry out the duties of Lifeguard 3 as
identified above.
J
Lifeguard 4 Gently place the hand nearest the casualty’s feet on the casualty’s eyebrows using thumb and
forefinger to secure head (pic K)
Lifeguard 2 Gently remove hands, hold onto the rescue board and reassure the casualty throughout
(pic L and M)
4 4 4
2 K 2 L 2 M
NPLQ Generation 9
Lifeguard 4 Bring the head restraint to the casualty’s head with free hand
Place the restraint over first hand. Ensure the bottom of the restraint is level with the
casualty’s eyebrows (pic N)
Carefully remove first hand (pic O)
4 4
N O
Lifeguard 4 Maintain contact with second hand, which is holding the head restraint in place
Using free hand gently tighten one side strap, then the other side strap (no particular order)

and continue to do this until secure (pic P and Q)
Then tighten the top strap (apex strap) (pic R)
4 P 4 Q 4 R
Lifeguard 4 Apply and gently tighten the remaining straps, working down the body towards the feet,
blue strap, then orange, black and white (pic S and T)
4 4
S T
The white strap should not be over tightened if below the casualty’s ankle joint and may not need to be used.
The casualty is now ready to be removed from the water by the team.
135
Removal of the casualty from the water

The casualty should be removed from the water in a horizontal position. The lifeguard team supporting the
board should position it at right angles to the poolside. One team member should climb onto the side to
be ready to receive the board as it comes out of the water. The other three team members should position
themselves with two supporting the head end and the third at the foot end.
Lifeguard 1 Responsible for all instructions throughout the recovery

Lifeguards Place the head end of the board at right angles to the poolside (pic U)
After a count of three, lift the board and place the head end on the side
Keep the board level (pic V)
Gently slide the board fully onto the poolside. Reassure the casualty throughout

1 1
U V
Be careful if a casualty has long hair – make sure it does not get caught under the board when it
slides onto the poolside.
Secure the rescue board

Once the board is firmly on the poolside, it should be moved away from the water and arrangements made
to cover the casualty. If the casualty on the rescue board requires CPR, the head and chest strap may be
loosened or moved to allow effective CPR and use of an AED.
2.5.2 Recovery when a Rescue Board is not Available or the

Casualty is Unresponsive
Where and when?
Where a rescue board is not provided at a pool, or in the event of the urgent need (where the casualty
is deemed to be unresponsive after asking “Are you all right?” or regurgitates their stomach contents) to
remove the casualty from the water, an alternative technique must be used.
How?
Lifeguard 1 near the shoulders, supporting the upper part of the back and reassures the casualty throughout
Lifeguard 2 holding the head as shown
Trained person 3 beside the hips supporting the casualty’s upper thigh and lower spine
Trained person 4 beside the lower limbs providing support
Trained person 5 on the poolside
Before being recovered, the casualty needs to be stabilised and supported in shallow water, as described
earlier. Lifeguard 1 must first make sure that the hands of the members of the rescue team supporting
the casualty are placed palm down. The casualty must then be moved gently, maintaining the horizontal
position and neutral alignment, to the point at the poolside where they will be lifted out of the water, usually
the nearest appropriate side of the pool.
A minimum of two lifeguards and three trained people are needed for this type of recovery. The lifeguards
and other members of the team should be positioned as illustrated:
NPLQ Generation 9
• The lifeguard at position 1 supporting the upper
1 2 part of the back should control the recovery of
3 the casualty throughout this manoeuvre
4 • It’s important to make sure the casualty is kept
horizontal throughout the lift. Lifeguard 1 should
make sure 3 and 4 are supporting the casualty
on their forearms (palms down)
5
2

3
• Lifeguard 1 should communicate with team and instruct the lift of the casualty out of the water
• At this point, lifeguard 5 should move to take over the support of the casualty’s head from lifeguard 2
as the casualty is moved onto the poolside
• Once lifeguard 5 is in position with their hands over lifeguard 2’s hands, lifeguard 2 can remove their
hands gently by sliding them out and lifeguard 5 will then take over control of the casualty’s head
137
• The final stage of the recovery consists of lifeguard 4, 3 and 1 sliding their arms and hands out from
under the casualty
As each person removes each arm from under the casualty, they may be able to provide support
using their forearm along the side of the casualty’s body to help stabilise the casualty and reduce
movement as the arm is removed. Once each person has removed their arm they can assist the next
person in this task
• Lifeguard 4 removes their hands first, then lifeguard 3 and finally lifeguard 1 at the shoulder end of
the casualty
1 5 1 5
3 3
4 4
• Once the supporting hands have been removed,

2 lifeguard 5 remains in the supporting position at
1 the casualty’s head with firm control
• If the casualty’s head is not naturally resting on
3 5 the pool floor, you may need to put a soft pad
4 between their head and the pool floor
2.5.3 Casualty Aftercare

Once the casualty has been recovered onto the poolside, secured or otherwise on a rescue board, it is
important that appropriate aftercare is given.
Once on the poolside, wrap them carefully in dry, heat retaining material to prevent heat loss. Unnecessary
movement should be avoided; for example, there is no need to recover a casualty to a first aid room unless
absolutely necessary.
Urgent transfer to hospital is essential and the EAP should have made sure that, by the time the casualty
has been recovered on to the poolside, 999/112 should have been called to summons emergency help.
Where the casualty has been rescued on an RLSS UK approved rescue board, there is no need to transfer
the casualty to another device. This board is compatible with stretcher mountings in UK ambulances and it
can also be used during X-ray and Magnetic Resonance Imaging (MRI).
NPLQ Generation 9
2.5.4 Recovery from the Water using a Pool Extraction Board
The Ferno Pool Extraction Board (PXB) developed with the RLSS UK has been designed to assist
lifeguards* to extract a casualty from a range of swimming pool environments.
*a lifeguard or an individual who is suitably trained and competent.
The PXB and components:

The PXB has neutral-buoyancy floatation capability to allow for a casualty to be secured to the board
without need for any floatation devices. The PXB includes:
• Five colour-coded VELCRO® straps (restraints) to secure the body
• Two head blocks (designed not to sink in water) and strap to secure the head blocks
• A neoprene anti-slip mat
• A rubberised anchor mat attached to head-end of board ensures safe and effective stabilisation of the
board to the pool-side.
Yellow Leg Restraint

Headblock Black Leg Restraint Red Ankle Restraint PXB Board
Blue Chest Restraint
RESCUE & EMERGENCY ACTION PLAN

Head Restraint
Strap
SECTION 2: INTERVENTION,
Anchor Mat
Green Chest Restraint Neoprene Anti-Slip Mat
The PXB can be used for a range of casualties, methods will differ for each casualty:
• Conscious but unable to get out of the water (e.g. unwell or injured)
• Unconscious
• Casualty with suspected spinal injuries
The PXB can be used in the following swimming pools:

• Deck level pool – shallow water
• Deck level pool – deep water
• Pool with freeboard (max 30cm) – shallow water
• Pool with freeboard (max 30cm) – deep water
139
PXB methods
The casualty’s level of response and type of pool will determine the method to be used:
Types of Pool
Freeboard Deck level
Check for response Check for response
Yes casualty No response from Yes casualty No response from

responded casualty * responded casualty *
Use full PXB Remove casualty Use full PXB Remove casualty
method slowly and from water using full method slowly and from water swiftly
controlled PXB method applied controlled using unconscious
quickly method
If the casualty does not respond

*If the casualty is not responsive when the lifeguard asks ‘Are you all right?’ they should be removed
quickly from the water, taking care to limit movement of the head and neck as much as possible. The
priority, however, is to get the casualty to a position where breathing can be assessed fully and CPR
started if required.
PXB preparation and storage

The PXB will be stored at a point specified within the centre’s Normal Operating Procedure (NOP). The PXB
must be easily accessible. Some pools will specify where the PXB must be used to extract a casualty.
Where possible the PXB should be used at the shallow end of the swimming pool for improved stability.
During storage of the PXB it is important not to roll or crush the VELCRO® straps as this can reduce their
lifespan.
NPLQ Generation 9
In an emergency the PXB will need to be prepared ready for use by moving the black head block strap
onto one of the blocks and undoing the VELCRO® straps.
Response check
Lifeguard 1 Implement the EAP, enter the water and apply a head splint/vice grip turn, check
casualty’s response by asking loudly ‘Are you all right?’ Alert team & inform them of

casualty’s conscious state (Responsive / Unresponsive). The conscious state will
determine the method used to extract the casualty from the water
Head splint to vice grip
If the water is too shallow to perform a vice grip a head splint turn should be used. This sequence details
the steps from a head splint turn, however where water depth and casualty’s position permits use a vice
grip turn immediately.
Lifeguards 1&2 Maintain good communication throughout whilst reassuring the casualty
Lifeguard 2 Prepare the PXB and place on poolside ready for lifeguard 1
Lifeguard 2 Enter water and apply vice grip onto casualty (lower arm may go over or under the
lifeguard 1’s arm which will be across the casualty’s head), when vice grip is secure
communicate with lifeguard 1 and confirm the head splint can be released (pic A)
Lifeguard 1 Bring casualty’s arms carefully from above their head to their side, return to poolside to
collect the PXB. (pic B and C)
It is important to communicate with the casualty to give reassurance, this should include a brief description
of what is going to happen. Lifeguard 1 is in the best position to do this.
2 2
1 1
1
A B C
141
Deck level pool – shallow water method

Securing the PXB on poolside
Lifeguard 1 Slide the PXB in a slow, low and straight movement into the pool, holding each handle at
the top (pic A)
Lock the PXB into position by pulling it back towards you until the runners are next to the
pool edge and the PXB is secure (pic B)
Kneel close to the PXB on the anchor mat (this makes it easier to sink the PXB) then
remove both head blocks together and place one either side of you within easy reach (pic C)
1 1
A B
To sink the PXB

Lifeguard 1 Place hands in first strap holes (pic D)
Keep arms straight and lean forwards using body weight, this will sink the PXB.
This enables the casualty to be trawled onto the PXB (pic E)
1 2
D E
NPLQ Generation 9
Securing the casualty to the PXB
Lifeguard 1 Pause at the bottom of the PXB, communicate with lifeguard 2 to ensure casualty’s body
is aligned for a central position on the PXB (pic F)
Lifeguard 2 Perform a slow controlled trawl to the top of the PXB. Apply gentle, upward pressure with
your lower arm if required (aim for casualty’s shoulders to be at the top of the wide black
mat, their head will then be in between the two strips of VELCRO® where the head blocks
attach) (pic G)
Lifeguard 1 When the casualty is reaching your arms, release pressure on the PXB by bending elbows
and leaning back to enable the casualty to be trawled onto the PXB (and for the PXB to
raise to support the casualty). Use your arms to stabilise the PXB (pic H)
1 2 1 1 2
2
F G H

Lifeguard 2 Keeping your top arm of the vice grip in place, carefully remove your lower arm leading
with your elbow (pic I & J)
Position arm underneath the PXB, holding firmly to stabilise (pic K)
2 1 2 1 1 2
I J K
Lifeguard 1 Confirm lifeguard 2 has the PXB and casualty is held securely, apply support and stabilise
the casualty’s head in a neutral position (head, neck and spine aligned). Support the
casualty’s head with both hands, spreading your fingers out to ensure the casualty’s ears
are not directly covered and the casualty is able to hear. Arms must be in contact with the
PXB to maintain effective stabilisation (pic L)
Lifeguard 2 Confirm lifeguard 1 has control of the casualty’s head and PXB then remove the vice grip
(pic M)
1 2 1 2
L M
143
Lifeguard 2 Apply the green strap first, then blue strap across the casualty’s chest. Ensure the
VELCRO® straps are firmly fastened securing the casualty to the PXB (pic N and O)
Re-apply the top arm of the vice grip and reach with your other arm under the PXB to
maintain stability of the PXB throughout. Confirm to lifeguard 1 you have control of the
PXB and casualty (pic P)
2 1 2
2
1 1
N O P
Lifeguard 1 Take the head blocks from side of the pool and line them up with the casualty’s shoulders.
Ensure there is no hair where the head blocks will be placed
Squeeze the blocks gently against either side of the casualty’s head and on shoulders. Set
blocks in place simultaneously (pic Q)
Apply the short black VELCRO® strap across the blocks to secure in place (this may be
across the casualty’s forehead) (pic R)
Place your arms on the PXB and hold the sides to take over stability of the PXB (pic S)
1 1
1 2
2 2
Q R S
Lifeguard 2 Confirm lifeguard 1 has control of the PXB and casualty, then apply the yellow and black
straps across the casualty, then apply the red strap if required (pic T and U)
When the strapping is complete move to the foot end of the PXB and stabilise securely
with both hands (pic V)
2
1 2 1 2
T U V
NPLQ Generation 9
To lift the casualty out of the pool
Lifeguard 1 Carefully stand whilst remaining in contact with the anchor mat at all times, using both hand
holds on the anchor mat (pic W)
With a stable foot position and keeping close to the PXB, bend knees, keep back straight
and lift the PXB (use the command ‘ready, steady, lift’). The lift MUST only be performed
if the casualty is central and stable on the PXB
Lift only the amount necessary to clear the poolside edge, then immediately lower the PXB
onto the side of the pool (pic X)
Carefully slide the PXB with casualty onto poolside (pic Y)
Lifeguard 2 Ensure stability of the PXB throughout whilst assisting to slide the PXB onto the side of the
pool (pic Y)
1 2 1 1
2
2

W X Y
Once on poolside reassure the casualty, be
prepared for CPR (pic A) and or action for
regurgitation (pic B/C).
Follow the EAP
B C
145
Deck level pool – deep water method

The PXB can be used in the same way as detailed for shallow water in a deck level pool with some minor
differences.
Lifeguard 1 Will apply the Vice grip and trawl the casualty toward the PXB, they may need to continue
to trawl and tread water whilst waiting for the PXB (pic A)
Lifeguard 1 Will need to tread water whilst applying the straps, securing the casualty to the PXB (pic B)
2
2
1
1
A B
Pool with freeboard, maximum 30cm – shallow water method

For safety and stability 3 lifeguards are required to use the PXB in a pool with a freeboard
The PXB will be used in the same way as the deck level pool – shallow water method with the following
differences:
To stabilise and sink the PXB

Lifeguard 1 Apply the head splint turn and lifeguard (pic A)
Lifeguard 2 Apply the vice grip as per the shallow water deck level pool sequence (pic B)
Lifeguard 3 Place the PXB on the surface of the water, the anchor mat will be placed over the edge of
the pool. Lifeguard will need to lie on the anchor mat to secure the PXB (pic C)
1 3
1
A B C
Lifeguard 1 Sink the foot end of the PXB (pic D)

Lifeguard 1 Remain at the foot of the PXB to stabilise the PXB and keep the casualty secure (pic E)
Lifeguard 3 When applying support to stabilise the casualty’s head in a neutral position (head, neck
and spine aligned), where achievable elbows should be in contact with the PXB or the
pool wall to aid stability (pic E)
1
3 3
2 1
D E
NPLQ Generation 9
Lifeguard 3 Remain lying on the PXB anchor mat until Lifeguard 2 confirms they have secure hold of
the anchor mat (pic F)
Lifeguard 2 & 3 Lift the PXB and casualty out by using the handles on the anchor mat and taking hold of
the PXB handles using the term ‘ready, steady, lift’. The technique is similar to the assisted
lift technique (pic G)

The lift MUST only be performed if the casualty is central and stable on the PXB
As soon as the PXB is high enough it must be placed immediately onto the side of the
pool to aid stability of the PXB (pic H and I)
2 3 2

F G
3 2
H I
Lifeguard 1 Focus on stabilising the PXB and

supporting lifeguard 2 and 3 with 3 2
the lift out (pic J) 1
147
Pool with freeboard, maximum 30cm – deep water method

For safety and stability 3 lifeguards are required to use the PXB in a pool with a freeboard
The PXB will be used in the same way as the Deck Level Pool – Shallow Water method. The only
differences are:
Lifeguard 1 Apply the vice grip and trawl the casualty toward the PXB, they may need to continue to
trawl or tread water whilst waiting for the PXB (pic A)
Will need to tread water whilst applying the straps securing the casualty to the PXB
Lifeguard 3 Place the PXB on the surface of the water, the anchor mat will be placed over the edge of
the pool. Lie on the anchor mat to secure the PXB (pic B)
Lifeguard 2 Will need to tread water when sinking the PXB (pic B)
Will need to tread water when assisting with stabilisation of the PXB and security of
casualty (pic C)
Lifeguard 3 When applying support to stabilise the casualty’s head in a neutral position (head, neck
and spine aligned), where achievable elbows should be in contact with the PXB or the
pool wall to aid stability (pic E)
3
1
3
2
2
A B C

The technique is the same as for the shallow end lift out in a pool with a freeboard.
Lifeguard 1 and 3 perform the lift out on the side of the pool with lifeguard 2 focusing on stabilising the
PXB and supporting lifeguards 1 and 3 with the lift out (pic D). The lift MUST only be performed if the
casualty is central and stable on the PXB.
NPLQ Generation 9
Removal to hospital
Paramedics will scoop casualty off the PXB for removal to hospital following their current guidelines. The
PXB is not suitable to be used in X-Ray, CT or MRI machines.
Realigning the casualty on the PXB

The casualty position on the PXB is important. They must be on the PXB straight and central to ensure
they remain secure and stable throughout application and lift out.

If the casualty is not central and in line when they are first put onto the PXB their body position should be
altered.
The Lifeguard that pushed the PXB down into the water to allow the casualty to be trawled onto the PXB
should repeat this skill. This will sink the PXB away from the casualty.
The Lifeguard with the casualty in a vice grip should realign the casualty to be central on the PXB, they may
need to remove the casualty from the PXB and trawl back on.
Lower limbs can be realigned when the casualty’s upper body and head is secure and before the black,
yellow and red straps are applied.
1 2
149
Using a PXB with a narrow pool surround – deck level

The following technique can be used for swimming pools with a narrow pool surround (between
1.25 – 2m wide)
Lifeguard 1 & 2 Carefully slide the PXB with casualty onto poolside and stop when the swimming pool
edge is in line with the top of the handholds where the yellow and black straps are
located. (Pic A)
Lifeguard 1 Confirm that lifeguard 2 has control of the PXB, maintain contact with the PXB at all times
then grab hold of the hand holds at the top of the PXB. (Pic B, C)
1 1
B C
Lifeguard 1 & 2 Working together (using command ‘ready, steady, slide’) carefully slide the PXB parallel to
the poolside in a smooth motion (Pic D & E) ensuring PXB is clear of the pool edge.
2 1 2
D E
NPLQ Generation 9
Using a PXB with a narrow pool surround – freeboard
Lifeguard 1,2 & 3 Carefully slide the PXB with casualty onto poolside and stop when the swimming pool
edge is in line with the top of the handholds where the yellow and black straps are
located. (Pic F)
1 2

F
Lifeguard 1,2 & 3 Confirm the PXB is stable, then work as a team to slide the PXB parallel with the poolside
ensuring PXB is clear of the pool edge. (Pic G,H)
1 2 1 2
3 3
G H
Using a PXB in a leisure pool

To stabilise and sink the PXB
Lifeguard 1 Walk into the water with the PXB to a depth where the PXB can rest on the surface of the
water and in contact with your knee (pic A). As a guide the water will be just above
your knee. Arms must be in contact with the PXB and your knee in contact under the PXB
to maintain stabilisation. Remove the head blocks and secure to the board using the black
velcro strap so they do not float away.
Lifeguard 2 Sink the foot end of the PXB (pic B)
1
2
A B
151
Securing the casualty to the PXB

Lifeguard 3 Perform a slow and controlled trawl to the top of the PXB. Apply gentle, upward pressure
with your lower arm if required (aim for casualty’s shoulders to be at the top of the wide
black mat, their head will then be in between the two strips of VELCRO® where the head
blocks attach) (pic C)
Lifeguard 3 Keeping your top arm of the vice grip in place, carefully remove your lower arm leading
with your elbow (pic D). Position arm underneath the PXB, holding firmly to stabilise (pic D)
3
3 1
2
2
C D
Lifeguard 1 Confirm lifeguard 3 has the PXB and casualty is held securely, apply support and stabilise
the casualty’s head in a neutral position (head, neck and spine aligned), by supporting the
casualty’s head with both hands, spreading your fingers out to ensure the casualty’s ears
are not directly covered and the casualty is able to hear. Arms must be in contact with the
PXB and your knee in contact under the PXB to maintain stabilisation (pic E)
Lifeguard 2 Remain at the foot of the PXB and stabilise the PXB and keep the casualty secure (pic E)
Lifeguard 3 Confirm lifeguards 1 & 2 have control of the casualty and the PXB, then remove the vice
grip and apply the green strap first, then the blue strap across the casualty’s chest. Ensure
the VELCRO ® straps are firmly fastened securing the casualty to the PXB (pic F)
1 3
3 1
E F
Lifeguard 3 Re-apply the top arm of the vice grip and reach with your other arm under the PXB to
maintain stability of the PXB throughout. Confirm to lifeguard 1 you have control of the
PXB and casualty (pic G & H)
1
3
1
3
2
G H
NPLQ Generation 9
Lifeguard 1 Take the head blocks and line them up with the casualty’s shoulders. Ensure there is no
hair where the head blocks with be placed
Lifeguard 1 Squeeze the blocks gently against either side of the casualty’s head and on shoulders. Set
blocks in place simultaneously (pic I)
Apply the short black VELCRO® strap across the blocks to secure in place (this may be
across the casualty’s forehead) (pic J)
1
3 1
3
I J


Lifeguard 1 Place your hands in the hand holds of the PXB using your knee to support the PXB from
underneath
Lifeguard 3 Confirm lifeguards 1 & 2 control of the casualty and PXB then remove the vice grip then
apply the yellow and black straps across the casualty, then apply the red strap if required
Lifeguard 1 & 3 When the strapping is complete move to the head end of the PXB and place your nearest
hand into the handhold of the PXB and your other hand into the anchor mat handhold
Lifeguard 2 Maintain stability of the PXB
Lifeguard 1 Communicate with lifeguards 2 and 3, working as a team to walk the casualty slowly
towards the beach area and onto poolside. Be sure to keep the PXB on the surface
of the water
Lifeguard 1 When the casualty and PXB is clear of the water communicate with lifeguards 2 and 3 and
lover the PXB carefully onto the poolside. The PXB can be dragged further from the water
using the anchor mat if required
Once on poolside reassure the casualty, be prepared for CPR and or action for regurgitation.
3 1 3 1
2
2
153
Recovery for an unconscious casualty

Deck level pool – shallow/deep water method
The PXB can be used to extract an unconscious casualty from a swimming pool. The PXB will be used in a
similar way to the deck level methods detailed previously to extract a casualty with a suspected spinal injury.
Lifeguard 1 Trawl the casualty onto the PXB using an extended arm tow* (pic A). If lifeguard 2 is
not immediately available with the PXB rescue breaths can commence if required in the
water until lifeguard 2 arrives (see rescue breathing in the water)
*If the casualty is secured by a vice grip the grip will be removed as detailed previously, lifeguard 1 remove
the vice grip carefully when the casualty is in position on the PXB
Lifeguard 2 Place the PXB on the side of the pool and secure in position, using the methods as
described previously to sink the PXB (pic A)
Take hold of the casualty’s chin to keep the casualty secure (pic B)
2 2
1 1
A B
Lifeguard 1 Secure the casualty to the PXB using a green and blue strap, one from either side. The
straps should go across the main torso (pic C)
Lifeguard 1 & 2 Remove the casualty from the pool using the same techniques as previously
described (pic D)
2 2
1
C D
Once the casualty is on the poolside breathing can be assessed and CPR commenced if required.
Freeboard pool – shallow/deep water method (freeboard no greater than 30cm)

The full freeboard PXB methods must be used to extract an unconscious casualty from the water.
This should be applied swiftly as the priority is to extract the casualty to allow for a breathing check to be
completed.
NPLQ Generation 9
1. How could someone sustain a spinal injury in a swimming pool?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Give 3 symptoms and signs of a spinal injury
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. When dealing with a suspected spinal injury why should you stabilise the head and neck first?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. How should a casualty be removed from the pool with a suspected spinal injury?

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. What are the incident management priorities with a casualty with a suspected spinal injury?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. When are you more likely to use a vice grip turn?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. Where are your arms and hands when performing a vice grip trawl?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
8. When would you use a head splint turn?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
9. How do you perform a head splint turn?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
10. How many lifeguards and trained staff are needed in total to recover a casualty with a
rescue board?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
11. What straps may need to be loosened if a casualty on a rescue board requires CPR?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
12. How many lifeguards are required to use the PXB in a deck level pool and a pool with a
freeboard?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
155
ELEMENT 3 –
Emergency action plan (EaP)
What we will cover
An emergency action plan is a comprehensive
document detailing what action will be taken by
all employees in foreseeable emergencies.
In this section we are going to cover ‘What you
may see’ in an EAP and the role you play in an
emergency. Due to the vast amount of leisure centres
and the varied nature of those facilities, the detail that
follows is a starting point to assist you to understand
how the content of an EAP is applied. Your induction
will cover the EAP in detail at each facility that you
work as a lifeguard and this section will improve your
ability to apply and understand the information given
to you during the induction process.
3.0 ThE ROLE Of EaCh PERSON IN ThE

EMERGENCy aCTION PLaN
EAP Content What your employer will have set out What your role is
The role of each Having identified foreseeable You will need to learn the roles for
person in the emergencies within your facility, your each team member at the facility
Emergency employer then needs to develop where you work.
Action Plan. established arrangements for the Many centres carry out regular
management of those emergency incident training using the whole
procedures. In doing so they will have team to practise the emergency
considered the wider team on duty response, your attendance at these
at any one time within the leisure sessions is essential.
centre and as such the procedure will
designate a staff member to each role in
an emergency.
An example of staff who may be
involved in an emergency and their role
in addition to the lifeguard team:
• Duty Manager – coordinate the
emergency response
• Reception – call the emergency
services
• Gym Instructor – meet the
emergency services
NPLQ Generation 9
3.1 INCIdENT MaNaGEMENT
Incident The EAP will detail the response for In addition to understanding each
Management foreseeable emergencies and this will of the roles in an emergency
including: include the lines of communication in you will also need to understand
• Who is in an emergency as well as the hierarchy the lines of communication and
control and of control. This is to ensure the process for each team member at
manages the quickest possible response, to avoid the facility that you work.
situation confusion and reduce the likelihood of a
• Communication breakdown in communication to ensure
that there is not a delayed response and
information is as accurate as possible.
Each centre will detail the methods
of communication and how this is
managed at their facility.

3.2 OvERCROwdING
Overcrowding. If the NOP fails and the maximum pool Following your training ensure that
user loads are exceeded, the EAP all levels of communication are
will set out a procedure to manage followed.
overcrowding: An example of this would be to call
• Lines of communication out swimmers who had been in
• Access control and stopping the pool for over a set amount of
access time to manage a controlled and
One of the first things that many safe reduction in pool numbers.
centres do is stop further entry into Pools with a colour band system
the pool. Measures such as a sign on will be able to use this to call out
the entrance into the car park may swimmers in an orderly fashion.
reduce even more people coming
into the building while the situation is Care must be taken not to create
being brought under control or move the problem into other
• Emergency action: areas of the building as reducing
Reduce the number of people in the numbers quickly or clearing the
pool immediately pool could lead to an overcrowding
• Crowd management in the changing areas.
157
ELEMENT 3 – Emergency action plan (EaP)
3.3 dISORdERLy BEhavIOuR
Disorderly Personal safety is key and the EAP will Following your training ensure that
behaviour. outline how to deal with any threats all levels of communication are
of violence without increasing your followed.
personal risks. You will need to know the
• Lines of communication procedure in the EAP on how
Threats of violence can come in many to manage victim(s), friends and
forms and it is not always face to face relatives
with the potential for threats over the The EAP will detail who, when and
phone or internet. how the emergency services are
Examples of types of violence that may contacted.
be covered in common EAP content
would be:
• Physical violence
• Threat of violence
• Violence to staff
• Sexual assault
3.4 LOST OR fOuNd ChILd
Lost child. In a leisure facility it is possible for a Following your training ensure that
child to become lost or detached from all levels of communication are
their parent or guardian. followed.
• Lines of communication Common actions in many facilities
You will be trained in the EAP to deal may include:
with different scenarios that may include • Immediate check of all pool
the following and include: facilities to ensure the child is not
• Management of a child in the building in the pool unsupervised or in
• Management of a lost child in the any immediate danger
swimming pool environment • Obtain an accurate description of
• Managing the parent or guardian the child with as much detail as
• Safety of the child if found possible
• Service, agencies and emergency • Positioning staff at entrances and
service contacts exits of the building to check that
• Staff roles the child does not leave
• Immediate check of the local
surrounding area around the
facility
Contacting police to expand the
search if the child is not found
swiftly.
NPLQ Generation 9
3.5 LaCk Of waTER CLaRITy
Lack of water There are many factors which can It is essential that you know what
clarity. affect the clarity of the pool water. Your immediate action to take as soon
ability to see the full volume of the water as you notice that water clarity is
is essential to the safety of the pool deteriorating. The loss in water
users. In the event of clarity becoming quality can be slow and in some
compromised your employer will have cases quite fast depending on the
set a procedure to encompass the cause of the problem.
following: Following your training ensure that
• Immediate action – as soon as a all levels of communication are
problem is identified followed.
• Lines of communication
In most cases the pool will be
• Pool evacuation and or closure
evacuated until the clarity of the water
• Dealing with the public
can be restored. Evacuation must be
It is not just the visibility that can make it undertaken in a controlled and safe

difficult to supervise the pool and unsafe manner. The safety of the pool users
for swimmers, the water quality may leaving the pool is your responsibility.
also be hazardous. Good communication with pool
users is essential.
3.6 fIRE aNd EvaCuaTION PROCEduRES
Fire and Your employer will have a procedure Understand your role in the event
evacuation. which will feature the following: of a fire, for example:
• Lines of communication • Manage a controlled evacuation
• How to raise the alarm from the pool hall
• Fire alarms/call points • Direct pool users to the
• Controlled evacuation of building designated assembly points
• Evacuation of pool users which will be located outside of
• Assembly points the building
• Managing pool users and young children
Particular attention will be given to:
• How to manage swimming lessons
and children • Managing pool users with young
• Evacuation of sessions for people with children
disabilities • Managing swimming lessons and
• Contacting emergency services children
• Staff roles • Evacuation of disabled swimming
• Access and arrival of emergency sessions
services Keep exit routes clear
In addition to the EAP you need to know Ensure compliance with no
how to spot potential fire hazards and smoking policies
action to rectify issues including: Following your training ensure that
• Internal fire doors wedged open all levels of communication are
• Fire doors/routes obstructed followed.
• Litter bins overflowing
• Carelessness with matches/cigarettes
• Faulty electrics
• Unattended equipment in public areas
159
3.7 BOMB ThREaT
Bomb threat. Your employer will have produced a Understand your role in the
system to deal with a bomb threat. event of a bomb threat or act of
Some centres may have also identified terrorism, for example:
the need to include the procedure for • Manage a controlled evacuation
a terrorist threat or act of terrorism. from the pool hall
These might include: • Direct pool users to the
• Action to take if you are alerted to a designated assembly points
bomb threat or threat of terrorism which will be located outside of
• Lines of communication the building
• Evacuation procedure Particular attention will be given to:
• Suspicious package procedure
• Managing pool users with young
• Staff roles and responsibilities
children
• Managing swimming lessons and
children
• Evacuation of disabled swimming
sessions
Following your training ensure that
all levels of communication are
followed.
Keep exit routes clear
Structured Activity
1. Give a number of other reasons why it may be necessary to evacuate a leisure centre.
Consider the hazards in the leisure centre that you are training in.
2. In your teams identify how many fire exits are in the pool area and where are the fire assembly points?
Also detail the location and types of equipment that may be required on evacuating the building.
NPLQ Generation 9
3.8 LIGhTING OR POwER faILuRE
Lighting or power Your employer will have a procedure Following your training ensure that
failure. which will detail roles and lines of all levels of communication are
communication in the event of lighting followed.
or power failure. It may include: As a lifeguard you will need to
• Immediate action – as soon as power know how to respond effectively in
failure occurs the following situation:
• Lines of communication • During the day
• Pool evacuation and or closure • During the night
• Dealing with the public • Controlled closure
It is important to note that even a • Emergency lighting and torches
power failure during the day can cause • Contacting energy suppliers/
significant operational and safety issues. utility companies
• Manage a controlled evacuation
With the above taken into account
from the pool hall

the EAP will detail when and how to
• If a full building evacuation is
close the building down in a controlled
required, direct pool users to
manner.
the designated assembly points
which will be located outside of
the building
children
children
sessions
Even if you can see the swimmers
in the pool area, remember that the
pool circulation, assistance alarms
and communication systems may
not be working and power back-
up systems may only work for a
limited amount of time
161
3.9 STRuCTuRaL, COMPONENT OR

EQuIPMENT faILuRE
Structural, Your employer will have a procedure Understand your role in the event
component or which will detail roles and lines of of structural or equipment failure,
equipment failure. communication in the event of structural for example:
or equipment failure. This may include: • Manage a controlled evacuation
• Action to take for minor and major from the pool hall
structural failure • If a full building evacuation is
• Evacuation procedure required, direct pool users to
• Lines of communication the designated assembly points
• Calling and information required for which will be located outside of
the emergency services the building
children
children
sessions
followed.
NPLQ Generation 9
3.10 TOxIC GaS EMISSION OR ChEMICaL SPILL
Toxic gas Your employer will have a procedure The plans outlined by your pool
emission or which will detail roles and lines of operator can be used or given to
chemical spill. communication in the event of toxic gas emergency services upon arrival
emission or chemical spills. to an emergency to help them
Many pool operators keep plans of the manage and contain the situation.
building detailing the location, type and Understand your role in the event
amount of chemicals in the building and of toxic gas emission or chemical
storage areas in the centre’s Evacuation spill, for example:
bag. • Manage a controlled evacuation
The procedure may also include: from the pool hall
• Evacuation procedure • Direct pool users to the
• Lines of communication designated assembly points
• Information required for emergency which will be located outside of
the building

services
children
children
sessions
followed.
3.11 SERIOuS INJuRy TO a MEMBER Of PuBLIC
Serious injury to a Your employer will have a procedure You may be required to make an
member of public. which will detail roles and lines of assessment of the situation before
communication in the event of a you, following your training ensure
member of public, using the facility, who that all levels of communication are
is seriously injured. followed.
This will include: You will need to know the
• Raising the alarm and lines of procedure in the EAP on how to
communication manage casualty(s), friends and
• Action and first aid administration relatives.
• Each person’s role You may need to consider who,
• Emergency equipment available when and how the emergency
(e.g. AED) services are contacted.
You may need to administer first aid.
Complete an accident form.
163
3.12 dISCOvERy Of CaSuaLTy IN ThE waTER
Discovery of Your employer will have a procedure Following your training ensure that
casualty in the which will detail roles and lines of all levels of communication are
water including communication in the event of a followed.
suspected spinal casualty being discovered in the pool. (Refer to section 3 for casualty
injuries and This may include: management.)
entrapment. • Raising the alarm and lines of If dealing with a pool user who has
communication become entrapped, your training
• Action and rescue may include an understanding
• Each person’s role of circulation cut-off to the pool
• Teamwork pumps and how this is managed in
• Emergency equipment an emergency.
Structured Activity
What are the roles and lines of communication when discovering a casualty in the water?
NPLQ Generation 9
3.13 faECaL, BLOOd OR vOMIT
POOL waTER CONTaMINaTION
Faecal, blood or Your employer will need to consider Understand your role in the event
vomit pool water actions to reduce the risk of sickness of pool contamination for example:
contamination. to swimmers in the pool. In most cases • Manage a controlled evacuation
of contamination it is important to close from the pool hall
the pool for enough time to allow the
pools systems to cope with and to kill Particular attention will be given to:
the bugs that can cause sickness and • Managing pool users with young
diarrhoea. children
• Lines of communication children
• Action to take in the event of • Evacuation of disabled swimming
contamination sessions
• Dealing with the public and

communication
• Showers all levels of communication are
• Reducing contamination followed.
• Pool closure requirements
• Delivery of information to the public
• When to reopen the pool and checks
to be made prior to opening
165
ELEMENT 3 – Emergency action plan (EAP)

1. What other team members might lifeguards work with in an emergency?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. What action could you take if the pool is overcrowded?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. What action could you take if a lost child is reported?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. Why would you take action if the water clarity began to deteriorate?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Give some examples as to when the evacuation alarm may be used?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. What action would you take if there was a power failure and the pool lighting failed outside
of daylight hours?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. What are the risks associated with a toxic gas emission or chemical spill?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
8. Give some examples of how a lifeguard could raise the alarm if there was a casualty in the water?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
9. Give an example of when you may have to clear the pool?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
10. Give 3 examples of what your employer would have set out if the pool water became
contaminated?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
NPLQ Generation 9
SECTION 3
Cardiopulmonary
Resuscitation, AED & First Aid
ELEMENT 1
Cardiopulmonary
Resuscitation (CPR)
ELEMENT 2
Automated External
Defibrillation (AED)
ELEMENT 3
First Aid
167
Section 3 CPR, AED and First Aid
CONTENTS
Element 1: Element 3:
Cardiopulmonary First Aid
Resuscitation (CPR) 3.0 Priorities of First Aid............................................195
1.0 Priorities of Casualty Management.....................170 3.1 NOP Relevant Content – First Aid Supplies
1.1 Chain of Survival.................................................170 and Training.........................................................196
1.2 Turning a Casualty onto the Back.......................171 3.2 Contents of a First Aid Box.................................197
1.3 Managing Regurgitation of Stomach Contents...171 3.3 Hygiene Procedures............................................198
1.4 Recovery Position...............................................172 3.4 Needles and Sharps............................................198
1.5 Asphyxia .............................................................172 3.5 History, Symptoms and Signs –
1.6 Cardiac Arrest......................................................173 Applying First Aid (Treatment).............................199
1.7 Principles of Airway Management.......................173 3.6 Taking Emergency Action....................................200
1.8 Sequence of CPR – Adult....................................174 3.7 Seeking Emergency Help....................................200
1.9 Child and Infant (Baby) CPR...............................177 3.8 Casualty Management........................................200
1.10 More than One Rescuer and CPR.......................178 3.8.1 Primary Survey........................................200
1.11 CPR Flow Chart...................................................178 3.8.2 Secondary Survey...................................200
1.12 Drowning and CPR..............................................179 3.9 Unconscious Casualty.........................................201
1.12.1 CPR – Rescue Breathing in the Water 3.10 Heart Attack........................................................202
and Recovery..........................................180 3.11 Shock .................................................................203
1.13 CPR Using a Pocket Mask..................................181 3.12 Breathing Problems.............................................204
1.14 Problems with CPR.............................................181 3.12.1 Asthma Attack.........................................204
1.14.1 Tracheostomies.......................................181 3.12.2 Anaphylaxis.............................................205
1.14.2 Regurgitation of Stomach Contents........181 3.12.3 Using an Adrenaline Auto-injector...........206
1.14.3 Air in Stomach.........................................181 3.12.4 Hyperventilation......................................209
1.14.4 Broken Ribs.............................................181 3.13 Dressings and Bandages....................................209
1.14.5 Chest Does Not Rise...............................182 3.14 Bleeding..............................................................210
1.14.6 Fluid in the Airway...................................182 3.14.1 Minor Injuries...........................................211
1.14.7 CPR in Confined Spaces.........................182 3.14.2 External Bleeding....................................212
1.15 Mouth–to–Nose Ventilation.................................182 3.14.3 Internal Bleeding.....................................213
1.16 Choking...............................................................182 3.14.4 Varicose Vein Bleed.................................213
1.16.1 Signs and Symptoms of Choking............183 3.14.5 Amputation..............................................213
1.16.2 Choking Flow Chart.................................183 3.14.6 Bleeding from the Nose...........................214
1.16.3 Treatment for an Adult.............................183 3.15 Splinters .............................................................214
• If the casualty becomes unresponsive, 3.16 Burns and Scalds................................................215
start CPR.............................................184 3.16.1 Severity of Burns.....................................216
1.16.4 Treatment for Infants and Children..........184 3.16.2 Sunburn...................................................216
1.16.5 Obese or Pregnant Casualties................185 3.17 Electric Shock.....................................................217
1.17 CPR and Injury to the Spine................................185 3.18 Fractures .............................................................218
1.17.1 Airway Management and CPR................186 3.19 Slings .................................................................219
1.17.2 Managing Regurgitation of 3.20 Dislocation...........................................................220
Stomach Contents..................................186 3.21 Sprains and Strains.............................................220
Revision : Section 3 Element 1............................. 187-188 3.22 Cramp .................................................................221
3.23 Head Injuries.......................................................222
3.24 Chest Injuries.......................................................223
3.24.1 Penetrating Chest Injuries.......................223
Element 2: 3.24.2 Flail Chest................................................223
Automated External 3.24.3 Fractured Ribs.........................................224
Defibrillation (AED) 3.25 Eye Injuries..........................................................224
3.26 Dental Injuries......................................................225
2.0 Guidelines for Use of an AED..............................190 3.27 Fainting .............................................................225
2.1 Placement of AED Pads......................................191 3.28 Stroke .............................................................226
2.2 Using an AED in a Swimming Pool 3.29 Poisoning – Drug, Alcohol, Chemical and Gases...227
Environment and if the Casualty is Wet...............191 3.30 Insect Bites and Stings.......................................228
2.3 Use of Oxygen.....................................................191 3.31 Diabetic Emergency............................................229
2.4 Minimising Interruptions in Chest 3.32 Seizures and Epilepsy.........................................230
Compressions.....................................................192 3.32.1 Seizures...................................................230
2.5 Infants and Children............................................192 3.32.2 Absence Seizures....................................231
2.6 Safety issues when using an AED.......................192 3.33 Heat and Cold Injuries.........................................231
2.7 What to store with the AED.................................193 3.33.1 Heat Exhaustion......................................231
2.8 AED Flow Charts.................................................193 3.33.2 Hypothermia............................................232
Revision : Section 3 Element 2.....................................194 3.34 Secondary Survey...............................................233
3.35 Checking Pulse to Monitor Casualty...................235
3.36 Moving and Handling Casualties.........................235
3.37 After the Accident/Incident..................................236
3.37.1 Clean Up..................................................236
3.37.2 Fill Up......................................................236
3.37.3 Write Up..................................................236
Revision : Section 3 Element 3............................. 239-241
NPLQ Generation 9
ELEMENT 1 –
Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation (CPR)
What we will cover
A basic understanding of how the body works
will help you identify potential problems, deal
with developing emergencies, take appropriate
action, and handle difficulties that may occur
when carrying out CPR.
The human body is built on a skeleton of bones
which gives it shape and support and helps
protect the internal organs. Muscles that shorten
and lengthen are connected to the bones to allow
movement. Nerves from the brain travel through the
spinal cord and outwards to all parts of the body
carrying messages to enable movement. Other
nerves travel back to the brain carrying various
sensations such as touch, pain, joint position
sense, heat and cold, and movement. ‘Voluntary
movements’ are ones we decide to make, such
as walking. ‘Involuntary movements’ take place
without our conscious control, and are the essential
everyday movements that keep us alive, such as
the pumping of the heart.
To move, we need energy. This comes from digested
food that is broken down, absorbed into the blood,
and distributed round the body ready to produce
energy. Anything our body does not need becomes
a waste product, and is passed out in the urine or
faeces, or exhaled from the lungs.
To release the energy from food, we need to get enough oxygen out of the air we breathe. When we fill
our lungs with air, oxygen is taken up by the blood. This is what we mean by respiration. Anything that
prevents us getting oxygen causes asphyxia.
Blood with oxygen in it is pumped away from the heart through arteries to all parts of the body. When the
oxygen has been used, the blood goes back to the heart through the veins and then to the lungs, where
it gets a new supply of oxygen. Moving the blood around the body through arteries and veins is called
circulation. Everything that happens in our body depends on the oxygen carried in our blood. Without it,
the body stops working.
The brain is the most sensitive part of our body and it must have oxygen. If the heart stops, no blood
is pumped round the body, so no oxygen is carried to the brain. Within seconds, a casualty will start to
SECTION 3: CPR, AED & FIRST AID
lose consciousness and after a few minutes will die. Starting CPR (cardiopulmonary resuscitation – a
combination of chest compression and rescue breathing) as soon as possible after someone has stopped
breathing and their heart has stopped is vital if their life is to be saved.
169
ELEMENT 1 – Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation (CPR)
1.0 Priorities of casualty management

The way an emergency is managed will be set out in your Emergency Action Plan (EAP). However, when
faced with any resuscitation emergency there are priorities that apply wherever you are.
In order to determine what you need to do, your initial concern is the ABC of survival:
• Airway: make sure that the casualty’s airway is open
• Breathing: look, listen, feel for breathing
• Circulation: start chest compression
Priorities when treating a casualty

Life–threatening emergencies must be managed first and must take priority over all other injuries. In
general, the priority is:
• Emergency CPR
• Management of choking
• Control of life–threatening bleeding
• Care of the unconscious breathing casualty
• Treatment for shock
• Medical attention
Although it is unusual for a lifeguard to be faced with severe bleeding, there are occasions when the rate of
blood loss is so significant that you must attempt to stop the bleeding before resuscitation can be effective.
1.1 Chain of survival

The key stages in the life support sequence can be described as the Chain of Survival:
Early recognition:
Implement your EAP, call for help and alert the emergency services (particularly an ambulance) as
soon as possible in order to get professional help on its way.
Early cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR):

Those who are present when a casualty has a cardiac arrest (heart stops beating) should start
CPR as soon as possible.
Early defibrillation:
This is a technique of applying a controlled electric shock across the chest to re–start the heart.
Defibrillators are carried by all emergency ambulances in the UK and, increasingly, are being
provided in more public areas.
Post–resuscitation care:
Includes various medical and paramedical procedures such as injecting drugs into a vein and
using specialised artificial ventilation equipment.
NPLQ Generation 9
1.2 Turning a casualty onto the back
It is important to know how to turn a casualty onto their back as there may be situations when you will need
to turn a casualty, such as when you may need to perform CPR.
• Kneel by the casualty’s side and turn their head to face away from you
• Place the arm nearest to you above their head
• With one hand grasp the casualty’s far shoulder, and with your other hand clamp their wrist to their hip
• With a steady pull, roll the casualty over against your thighs
• Lower the casualty gently to the ground on their back, supporting their head and shoulders as you do so
• Place the casualty’s extended arm by their side
It is important to turn the casualty over carefully but as quickly as possible.
1.3 Managing regurgitation

of stomach contents
Because water is usually swallowed during drowning, a
casualty frequently regurgitates fluid during the rescue
process, particularly during attempts at resuscitation. If
this occurs, urgent action is required as detailed below.
Regurgitation of stomach contents commonly

occurs during or immediately following successful
resuscitation. The danger is that this material will enter
the air passages and lungs, not only interfering with
breathing, but subsequently causing a particularly
severe form of pneumonia. Immediate action is
essential:
• Turn the casualty away from you, keeping them
on their side and use your elbow and forearm to
prevent them from toppling onto their front
• Ensure the head is turned towards the floor and the
casualty’s mouth is open and at the lowest point,
thus allowing stomach contents to drain away
• Clear any residual debris from the mouth with
your fingers; and immediately turn them onto their
back, re–establish an airway, and continue CPR
171
1.4 Recovery position

An unresponsive casualty, whose airway is clear and who you are sure is breathing normally, should be
turned into the recovery position. This prevents the tongue falling back to block the airway, and reduces
the risk of regurgitated stomach contents entering the airway. In certain situations, such as when the
casualty has suffered significant physical injury, it may NOT be appropriate to move them into the recovery
position, unless their airway is in imminent danger from regurgitation, or if you have to leave them, for
example to attend multiple casualties or to call 999/112. It is important to ensure breathing really is normal
and not a return of agonal gasps.
• Remove the casualty’s glasses or goggles if worn
• Kneel beside the casualty and make sure that both the legs are straight, with feet together
• Place the arm nearest to you out at right angles to the body, elbow bent with the hand palm–up (Picture 1)
• Bring the far arm across the chest, and hold the back of the hand against the casualty’s cheek
nearest to you (Picture 2)
• With your other hand, grasp the far leg just above the knee and pull it up, keeping the foot on the
ground (Picture 3)
• Keeping the hand pressed against the cheek, pull on the far leg to roll the casualty towards you onto
their side
• Adjust the upper leg so that both the hip and knee are bent at right angles
• Tilt the head back to make sure that the airway remains open
• If necessary, adjust the hand under the cheek to keep the head tilted and facing downwards to allow
liquid material to drain from the mouth (Picture 4)
• Check breathing regularly
It is important to check breathing regularly to ensure the casualty’s breathing remains normal. Be
prepared to restart CPR immediately if the casualty deteriorates and stops breathing normally.
1 2 3 4
If the casualty has to be kept in the recovery position for more than 30 minutes they should be turned
to the opposite side to avoid prolonged pressure on the lower arm. You should only leave the casualty
unattended if absolutely necessary, for example to attend to other casualties.
CAUTION
Abdominal thrusts should NOT be used in an attempt to clear water from the airway of a drowning
casualty, as little water is likely to be there and it may cause regurgitation of fluid from the stomach, with
the risk that this will pass down into the lungs.
1.5 Asphyxia
Asphyxia (suffocation) is a condition arising when the body is deprived of oxygen. Causes include:
• The tongue blocking the airway of an unconscious casualty
• A foreign object stuck in the throat
• Strangulation
• The mouth and nose being accidentally or deliberately covered (suffocation)
• Drowning
NPLQ Generation 9
1.6 CARDIAC ARREST
The term cardiac arrest means that the heart has stopped pumping blood around the body. The heart may
have stopped beating altogether (asystole) or be twitching in a completely irregular and ineffective way
(ventricular fibrillation). In either case, there is no circulation of blood.
Cardiac arrest may be due to a lack of oxygen resulting from asphyxia caused, for example, by drowning.
More commonly, it occurs because of direct damage to the heart through injury, coronary thrombosis
(a heart attack), electric shock, or some other medical condition. Within seconds, the casualty will lose
consciousness and, if the heart is not restarted, will die within a few minutes. Urgent action is needed if the
casualty is to survive.
Immediately following cardiac arrest blood flow to the brain is reduced to virtually zero. A short period of
seizure-like movements can occur at the start of a cardiac arrest. You should be suspicious of cardiac
arrest in any casualty presenting with seizures, and you must assess the casualty for normal breathing
once the seizures have ended - if unresponsive and with absent or abnormal breathing, start CPR.
Cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) will buy time until more advanced medical assistance arrives.
1.7 PRINCIPLES OF AIRwAy MANAGEMENT

The principles of airway management are shown simply in the diagrams below:
1. Casualty airway without head tilt and chin lift
2. By applying head tilt and chin lift this will lift the
tongue and open the airway, as shown above
173
1.8 Sequence of CPR – Adult

In the event of any emergency before taking
action you should activate the EAP
1. Make sure the casualty, any bystanders, and
you are safe.
2. Check the casualty and see if they respond:

• Gently shake their shoulders and ask loudly,
“Are you all right?”
3A. If the casualty responds:

• Leave the casualty in the position in which you
find them provided there is no further danger
• Try to find out what is wrong with them and get
help if needed
• Reassess the casualty regularly
3B. If the casualty does not respond:

• Turn the casualty onto their back, then open the
airway using head tilt and chin lift
Place your hand on the forehead and gently
tilt the head back
With your fingertips under the point of the
casualty’s chin, lift the chin to open the airway
4. Keeping the airway open, look, listen and

feel for normal breathing for no more than 10
seconds:
• Look for chest movement
• Listen at the casualty’s mouth for breath sounds
• Feel for air on your cheek
In the first few minutes after cardiac arrest a casualty
may be barely breathing or taking infrequent, slow,
noisy gasps (snoring sound). This is often termed
as agonal gasps and must not be confused with
normal breathing. Agonal gasps are an indication to
start CPR immediately.
If you have any doubt whether breathing is normal
start CPR immediately.
5. If the casualty is not breathing normally:

Call an ambulance (999/112)
• Implement the EAP, ask a helper to call the
emergency services. Otherwise call 999/112
yourself, staying with the casualty if possible
• Activate the speaker function on the phone to aid communication with the ambulance service
• Send someone to get an AED if one is available; do not leave the casualty to get one yourself
unless one is already available at the site of the cardiac arrest
• Start CPR
The initial assessment (danger; response; airway; breathing; 999/112) should be carried out in
rapid succession to ensure that CPR is started and an AED is available as soon as possible.
NPLQ Generation 9
Start chest compressions as follows:
• Kneel by the side of the casualty
• Place the heel of one hand in the centre of the casualty’s chest (which is the
lower half of the sternum (breastbone))
• Place the heel of your other hand on top of the first hand
• Interlock the fingers of your hands and ensure that pressure is not applied over
the casualty’s ribs
• Keep your arms straight
• Do not apply any pressure over the upper abdomen or the bottom end of the
bony sternum (breastbone)
• Position your shoulders vertically above the casualty’s chest and press down on
the sternum to a depth of 5–6cm
• After each compression, release all the pressure on the chest without losing
contact between your hands and the sternum
• Repeat at a rate of 100–120 times a minute (up to two compressions a second),
with as few interruptions as possible
• Compression and release should take an equal amount of time
6A. Give rescue breaths:

After 30 compressions open the airway again using head tilt and chin lift and give 2 rescue breaths.
• Pinch the soft part of the nose closed, using the index finger and thumb of your hand on the forehead
• Allow the mouth to open, but maintain chin lift
• Take a normal breath and place your lips around their mouth, making sure that you have a good seal
• Blow steadily into the mouth while watching for the chest to rise, taking about 1 second as in normal
breathing; this is an effective rescue breath
• Maintaining head tilt and chin lift, take your mouth away from the casualty and watch for the chest to
fall as air comes out

• Take another normal breath and blow into the casualty’s mouth once more to achieve a total of two
effective rescue breaths. Do not interrupt compressions by more than 10 seconds to deliver two breaths
• If the initial breath of each sequence of two does not make the chest rise as in normal breathing, then
before your next attempt:
Check the casualty’s mouth and remove any visible obstruction
Recheck that there is adequate head tilt and chin lift
Do not attempt more than two breaths each time before returning to chest compressions
• Then return your hands without delay to the correct position on the sternum and give a further 30
chest compressions
175
Continue with chest compressions and rescue breaths in a ratio of 30:2
6B. If an AED arrives

Switch the AED on and use following the guidance in the AED section
7. Continue CPR:
Do not interrupt resuscitation until:
• A health professional tells you to stop
• You become exhausted
• The casualty is definitely waking up, moving, opening eyes and breathing normally
It is rare for CPR alone to restart the heart. Unless you are certain the person has recovered continue CPR.
7A. If you are sure the casualty is breathing normally:

• Turn them into the recovery position
• Ensure the EAP has been implemented and help from the ambulance service has been summoned
• Only leave the casualty yourself if there is no other way of obtaining help
• Continue to assess for normal breathing. If in any doubt, start CPR
Chest–compression–only CPR:
• If you are unable to give rescue breaths, perhaps as a result of severe facial injury to the casualty, give
chest compressions only
• If chest compressions only are given, these should be continuous at a rate of 100–120 per minute
NPLQ Generation 9
1.9 Child and Infant (baby) CPR
An ‘infant’ is defined, for the purposes of resuscitation, as in the first year of life.
A ‘child’ is considered to be from the first year of life to the age of 18 years. If the rescuer believes the
casualty to be a child, the child guidelines should be followed.
When carrying out resuscitation of infants or children, the techniques of rescue breathing and chest compression
are similar to those for an adult, modified to allow for the difference in size and maturity of the casualty.
It is rare for an infant’s or a child’s heart to stop unexpectedly (cardiac arrest). Problems with the airway
and breathing are far more common and, if not treated rapidly and correctly, may lead to cardiac arrest due
to lack of oxygen in the blood. As heart attacks, a major cause of cardiac arrest in adults, are so rare in
infants and children, particular attention must be given to obtain a clear airway in any infant or child whose
heart has stopped or who has stopped breathing. This may include action to relieve choking.
In infants and children, breathing may become obstructed or stop because of:
• Inhalation of stomach contents, regurgitation of food, or a foreign body such as a small toy or peanut
• Submersion in water (drowning)
• Infection of the throat (croup) or lungs (pneumonia)
• Injuries to the head, neck, or chest
Many children do not receive resuscitation because potential rescuers fear causing harm. This fear is
unfounded. The adult sequence may be used for children and infants, but the chest should be compressed
by one third of its depth.
As a lifeguard you may well be faced with the need
to carry out CPR on an infant or child. The following
modifications to the adult sequence of CPR will
make it even more suitable for use in children, who
are more likely to suffer from a breathing problem
(including suffocation) than a heart attack:
• Having asked someone to call an ambulance
and fetch an AED give 5 initial breaths before
starting chest compressions
• When giving rescue breaths to an infant, ensure
a neutral position of the head. As an infant’s
head is usually flexed when lying on their back,
this may require some gentle extension and
chin lift.
• Compress the chest by one-third of its depth
Use two fingers for an infant under one year
Use one or two hands for a child over one
year as needed to achieve an adequate
depth of compression
• It is rare for chest compressions to injure a
child’s or infant’s chest

• If you are on your own, perform CPR for
approximately one minute before going for help
177
1.10 More than one rescuer and CPR

It is important for lifeguards to work in teams. Chest compressions, in particular, are very tiring and when
more than one rescuer is present at a resuscitation attempt they should perform CPR in turn, changing
over about every two minutes to prevent fatigue. Ensure the minimum of delay during the changeovers.
This applies for all types of casualty, adult, child and infant.
1.11 CPR Flow Chart
CPR Flow Chart for Adult, Child and Infant casualties
Unresponsive and not breathing normally
Call 999/112 and ask for an ambulance
If drowning, child or infant give 5 rescue breaths
30 Chest compressions
2 Rescue breaths
Continue CPR 30:2
As soon as AED arrives switch it on and

follow instructions
NPLQ Generation 9
1.12 Drowning and CPR
Death from drowning results from asphyxia (suffocation) following immersion in water. In simple terms,
drowning occurs when a casualty’s head is underwater and air cannot get into the lungs.
The casualty’s head submerges and water enters the mouth, usually resulting in the closure of the airway.
This is a similar reaction to the one that prevents food and liquid entering the lungs during swallowing.
When someone is drowning, the airway seals as a safety mechanism to prevent water getting into the
lungs, but this also means they cannot breathe.
The first emergency action is to lift the casualty’s head clear of the water and to make sure their airway is
open. If the casualty remains submerged, they will start to swallow water. Because of a lack of oxygen,
they will become unconscious and stop attempting to breathe. The reflex spasm which closed the airway
then relaxes and water enters the lungs. Death will follow shortly afterwards.
Medical conditions or emergencies may be the underlying cause of drowning, either because they cause
collapse of the casualty whilst in the water, or they lead to them falling into the water in the first place.
Examples of such conditions are:
• Stroke
• Heart Attack
• Hyperventilation
• Asthma attack
• Seizures
• Hypothermia
Because a drowning casualty is short of oxygen, rescue breaths are a priority. Therefore on an adult,
child or infant commence CPR with 5 initial rescue breaths (after you have asked someone to call an
ambulance and fetch an AED).
If the rescue breaths do not make the chest rise as in normal breathing, then, before your next attempt:
• Check the casualty’s mouth and remove any visible obstruction
• Recheck that there is adequate head tilt and chin lift
• Do not attempt more than five breaths before starting chest compressions
Effects of drowning – care on recovery

The possible damaging effects of water entering the lungs can be delayed for up to 72 hours. It is important,
therefore, that any casualty who has been submerged under water, more than momentarily, or who has
needed resuscitation call 999/112 for emergency services, even if they seem to have made a full recovery.
179
1.12.1 CPR – Rescue Breathing in the Water and Recovery

If possible, recover the casualty onto the side of the pool or other point of firm support with help from other
members of your team. If team support is not available, you may have to start rescue breathing while the
casualty is still in the water. It is virtually impossible to carry out effective chest compression on someone
in the water, but it is possible to carry out rescue breathing whilst unsupported in the water. However, this
requires considerable skill and stamina and results in a delay in recovering the casualty onto the poolside.
As soon as trained help arrives the casualty should be removed from the water immediately.
The mouth–to–nose technique of rescue breathing is preferable in the water because it frees an arm and
hand (used to close the nose in the mouth–to–mouth technique) to support the casualty and to hold on to
the side.
On reaching support:
• Support the casualty with one arm passing behind their neck to grip the side or other means of
support. Use your other hand to lift the casualty’s chin (Support Method 1)
• Swim the casualty to the poolside with your towing arm nearest the pool edge (your towing arm holds
the casualty’s chin). Place your other arm under the casualty’s neck and shoulders and your hand on
the pool edge (Support Method 2)
• If assistance is immediately available, recover the casualty onto the poolside
• If there is a delay before assistance arrives, look, listen, and feel for normal breathing for no more than
10 seconds
• If the casualty is NOT breathing normally, maintain chin lift and start rescue breaths using the mouth–
to–nose technique
• Maintain the chin lift and keep the casualty’s mouth closed. Form a seal around the casualty’s nose to
give rescue breaths
• Continue rescue breaths until assistance arrives to recover the casualty onto the poolside
• Once the casualty has been recovered onto the poolside, reassess for normal breathing
• If the casualty is NOT breathing normally, maintain head tilt and chin lift and give 5 rescue breaths
• Then give 30 chest compressions
• Continue with 2 rescue breaths to 30 compressions
• Ensure that an ambulance has been called
Support Method 1
Support Method 2
NPLQ Generation 9
1.13 CPR using a pocket mask
The risk of transfer of infection from casualty to you
(or you to casualty) is very low. However, it is highly
recommended that where possible a barrier device
is used when giving rescue breaths. The most
effective barrier device is the pocket mask with a
one–way valve to prevent the casualty’s exhaled air
being inhaled by the rescuer.
Masks are reusable but must be thoroughly cleaned
after use. One–way valves must be discarded after
use on a casualty.
1.14 PROBLEMS WITH CPR

The following points highlight instances where you might encounter problems with CPR:
1.14.1 Tracheostomies
Very rarely, a lifeguard may be faced with having to resuscitate a person who has undergone an operation
for the removal of the voice box (laryngectomy). This will leave an opening to the windpipe (stoma) in the
front of the neck, this is called a tracheostomy.
To carry out rescue breathing:
• Remove stoma cover – do not remove any tube that is in place
• Wipe any mucus from the stoma or tube
• Close the casualty’s nose and mouth
• Place your mouth around the opening in the neck
• Blow in through the stoma, watching the chest rise and fall as in the mouth–to–mouth technique
1.14.2 Regurgitation of Stomach Contents

See paragraph 1.3 Managing Regurgitation of Stomach Contents
1.14.3 Air in Stomach

If head tilt and chin lift are not adequate to produce a clear airway, extra force will be needed during rescue
breathing to blow air past the obstruction. This may drive air down into the stomach. As the stomach
distends (a swelling appears in the abdomen below the left lower ribs), it interferes with the downward
movement of the diaphragm and further interferes with air entering the lungs. There is also an increased
risk that the casualty may regurgitate stomach contents.
If distension of the stomach is seen:

• Attempt to improve the casualty’s airway by increasing head tilt and chin lift if possible
• Do not apply pressure over the stomach as this is very likely to induce regurgitation of stomach
contents
• Provided a clear airway is maintained, the air in the stomach is likely to escape gradually
1.14.4 Broken Ribs

During chest compression one or more ribs may be heard to break. In elderly people or those with
particularly rigid chests, this may be unavoidable. It is far more likely to occur if the hands are incorrectly
placed on the sternum with pressure no longer being applied directly downwards. If a rib does break, no
action should or can be taken during resuscitation, which should continue uninterrupted. After recovery,
the casualty may be expected to be in some pain.
181
1.14.5 Chest Does Not Rise

As previously noted, if the initial breath of each sequence of two does not make the chest rise as in normal
breathing, then, before your next attempt :
• Check the casualty’s mouth and remove any visible obstruction
• Recheck that there is adequate head tilt and chin lift
• Do not attempt more than 2 breaths each time before returning to chest compressions
1.14.6 Fluid in the Airway

In some situations, massive amounts of foam caused by admixing moving air with water are seen coming
out of the mouth of the casualty. Do not try and attempt to remove the foam as it will keep coming.
Continue rescue breaths and compressions.
1.14.7 CPR in Confined Spaces

Over–the–head CPR may be considered when it is not possible to perform compressions from the side, for
example when the victim is in a confined space e.g. changing cubical, flume splash down.
1.15 Mouth–to–nose ventilation

Mouth–to–nose ventilation is an effective alternative to mouth–to–mouth ventilation. It may be considered if
the casualty’s mouth is seriously injured or cannot be opened, when giving rescue breaths to a casualty in
the water, or where a mouth–to–mouth seal is difficult to achieve.
1.16 Choking
Choking occurs when a piece of food or other material is swallowed but goes down the trachea (windpipe)
rather than the oesophagus (gullet). This results in blockage of the airway. If this blockage is only mild, the
casualty will usually be able to dislodge it by coughing. However, if there is complete obstruction (severe
obstruction) to the flow of air, coughing may not be possible. Unless help is given urgently the casualty will
suffocate, become unconscious and may die.
Even a small piece of food may cause serious obstruction because its presence can lead to muscle spasm
in the region of the larynx (voice box).
NPLQ Generation 9
1.16.1 Signs and Symptoms of Choking
• The casualty may have been seen to be eating
• A child may have been seen putting an object into its mouth
• A casualty who is choking often grips their throat with one or both hands
• With a mild airway obstruction the casualty will be able to speak,
cough and breathe but will be distressed
• If the airway is completely obstructed (severe obstruction), the
casualty will be unable to speak, have a weakening cough, will be
struggling or unable to breathe, and their face may become blue and
congested with the veins standing out in the neck
• Casualty may become unconscious
1.16.2 Choking Flow Chart
Treatment of Adult, Child and Infant Choking
Assess severity
Severe airway obstruction Mild airway obstruction

(ineffective cough) (effective cough)
Encourage coughing
Conscious
Unconscious Continue to check for
Up to 5 back blows, up to deterioration to ineffective
Start CPR
5 abdominal thrusts* cough or until obstruction
relieved
*Abdominal thrusts are dangerous in infants, instead give 5 chest thrusts
1.16.3 Treatment for an Adult

If the casualty is breathing, encourage coughing but do
nothing else. If the casualty shows signs of becoming
weak or stops breathing or coughing, remove any
obvious debris or loose false teeth from the mouth and

give up to 5 back blows:
• Stand to the side and slightly behind the casualty
• Support their chest with one hand and lean them
well forwards so that when the obstruction is
dislodged it comes out of the mouth rather than
going further down the airway
• Give up to 5 sharp blows between the shoulder
blades with the heel of your hand. The obstruction
should be dislodged and fly out of the mouth
• The aim is to relieve the obstruction with each
blow rather than to give all 5
183
If back blows fail, try giving up to 5 abdominal

thrusts. This forces air out of the windpipe by a
sudden inward and upward movement of
the diaphragm.
• Stand behind the casualty and put both arms
round the upper part of their abdomen
• Make sure the casualty is bending well
forwards so that when the obstruction is
dislodged it comes out of the mouth rather
than going further down the airway
• Clench your fist and place it between the
umbilicus (navel) and the bottom end of the
sternum (breastbone). Grasp this hand with
your other hand
• Pull sharply inwards and upwards. The
obstruction should be dislodged and fly out of
the mouth
Check the casualty’s mouth: if the obstruction has not cleared, ask a helper to call the emergency services.
Otherwise call 999/112 yourself and activate the speaker function on the phone to aid communication with
the ambulance service.
Continue alternating 5 back blows with 5 abdominal thrusts.
Abdominal thrusts can cause serious internal injuries and all casualties receiving abdominal thrusts should
be examined for injury by a doctor.
If the casualty becomes unresponsive,

start CPR
Loss of consciousness may result in relaxation
of the muscles around the throat and allow air
to pass down into the lungs. If at any time the
choking casualty becomes unresponsive follow the
sequence of CPR below.
In summary:
• Support the casualty to the ground to prevent
any injury
• Ensure that 999/112 has been called
• Start CPR
1.16.4 Treatment for Infants and Children

The same principles of management of choking
applies to infants and children. You may find that it
is easier to support an infant on your on your knee
(or across your lap if seated) when giving back
blows. when giving back blows. It is important that
the head is lower than the chest to make sure that
the dislodged object comes out of the mouth.
In the case of infants, it is dangerous to give
abdominal thrusts. Instead, if 5 back blows
fail to relieve the obstruction, give up to 5 chest
thrusts. These are similar to chest compressions
and are applied to the same place on the sternum
(breastbone).
NPLQ Generation 9
The difference is that each thrust is sharper in
nature and delivered at a slower rate and each aims
to relieve the obstruction rather than all 5 having to
be given. It is important that the infant is on their
back on a firm surface (which could be your thigh)
and that the head is lower than the chest.
Check the casualty’s mouth: if the obstruction has
not cleared, ask a helper to call the emergency
services. Otherwise call 999/112 yourself and
activate the speaker function on the phone to aid
communication with the ambulance service.
If the obstruction is not expelled and the casualty
is still conscious, repeat the sequence of back
blows and chest or abdominal thrusts.
If the child or infant is or becomes unconscious, start CPR.
1.16.5 Obese or Pregnant Casualties

Chest thrusts may be used instead of abdominal thrusts for obese casualties if the rescuer is unable to
encircle the casualty’s abdomen. For choking casualties in the late stages of pregnancy, the rescuer should
use chest thrusts instead of abdominal thrusts.
1.17 CPR and injury to the spine

The lifeguard may be faced with the need to give CPR when injury to the spine is suspected, for example
if the casualty has sustained a fall, been struck on the head or neck, or has been rescued after diving into
shallow water.
Particular care must be taken during handling and resuscitation to maintain alignment of the:
• Head
• Neck
• Spine
Support and assistance from other team members will be needed. It is important to recognise that if the
casualty has been rescued to a point of stability and is not breathing normally, urgent removal is required
using the rescue board or horizontal spinal lift as a priority.
If the casualty’s breathing stops, or becomes abnormal, whilst they are secured on a rescue board, start
CPR without delay.
185
1.17.1 Airway Management and CPR

• When opening the airway, attempt to use chin
lift alone to avoid injury to the spine. If this
is unsuccessful, add head tilt, but only the
minimum needed to obtain a clear airway
• If the casualty is on a rescue board you may
have to release the head or chest strap (or
both) to allow effective chest compression and
rescue breathing
• When two lifeguards are present, one lifeguard
should kneel at the casualty’s head, look down
the line of the body, and support the head in
a neutral position, keeping their elbows on
the floor. The second lifeguard should perform
CPR in the normal way.
• Once the airway has been opened by the
lifeguard performing CPR, the head position
should be maintained by the lifeguard
stabilising the head, neck and spine
• In the unlikely event that only one lifeguard is
present, standard CPR should be performed
Resuscitation will always take priority over spinal injury management.
Following successful CPR, or for casualties with suspected spinal cord injury who are unconscious and
breathing normally, maintain the casualty on their back with the head stabilised and the airway open. Do
not put them into the recovery position unless it is absolutely necessary to leave the casualty alone, for
example when a single rescuer has to attend to other casualties, in which case do so as far as possible
maintaining head stabilisation.
1.17.2 Managing Regurgitation of Stomach Contents

If you need to turn the casualty onto their side due to regurgitation during CPR, the same principles for
managing regurgitation of stomach contents apply.
• If there is a lifeguard providing stabilisation ensure effective communication to roll the casualty while
keeping the head, neck and spine aligned
• Where there are additional trained team members they can assist with the roll of the casualty on or off
the rescue board
• In the unlikely event that you are on your own, carry out management of regurgitation in the normal
way taking care to minimise any head and neck movement
NPLQ Generation 9
Revision : Section 3 Element 1
1. What does ABC stand for?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. What are the priorities when treating a casualty?
i)_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
ii)______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
iii)______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
iv)_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
v)______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
vi)_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. What is the chain of survival?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. What does a head tilt and chin lift achieve?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Why is it important that treatment for a casualty, regurgitating stomach contents, is

carried out quickly?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. Why should you place an unresponsive casualty whose airway is clear, and who you are sure is
breathing normally into the recovery position?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. What is cardiac arrest?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
8. When giving CPR, if the initial breath does not make the chest rise what should you do?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
187

9. When giving CPR, if there is more than one rescuer when should another take over?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
10. When should you stop CPR?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
11. The possible damaging effects of water entering the lungs can be delayed for up to
how many hours?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
12. When should you use a pocket mask for CPR?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
13. What should you do when air enters the stomach when giving CPR?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
14. When would you give mouth–to–nose ventilations?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
15. What are the signs and symptoms of someone who is choking?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
16. When treating choking in an infant, abdominal thrusts are dangerous.

What should you use instead?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
17. What should you do if a casualty who is choking loses consciousness?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
18. How would you give CPR to a casualty with a suspected spinal injury?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
NPLQ Generation 9
ELEMENT 2 –
Automated external defibrillators (AED)
What we will cover
The majority of cardiac arrests are due, at least initially, to an
abnormal, fast, irregular beat of the heart known as ventricular
fibrillation (VF), and electrical defibrillation is well established
as the only effective treatment. Automated external
defibrillators (AEDs) are devices that deliver the necessary
controlled electric shocks to terminate VF. They analyse the
victim’s heart rhythm and determine if it is ‘shockable’ (i.e.
VF) or ‘non–shockable’ (i.e. normal rhythm or one that will not
respond to defibrillation).
The delay from collapse to delivery of the first shock is the single most important determinant of survival.
If defibrillation is delivered promptly, survival rates as high as 70% have been reported. The chance of
successful defibrillation declines at a rate of about 3 - 5 % with each minute of delay before a defibrillator is
used. CPR will help to maintain a shockable rhythm but is not a definitive treatment.
Having an AED within a facility, and a trained team to respond, helps to keep the time taken to treat a
casualty to a minimum. Due to the cost effectiveness of AEDs (including their maintenance) many facilities
now have AEDs on site. The location of an AED should be indicated with clear signage.
This design fulfilled the requirements of the European Union as far as colour, shape, and content are
concerned, and was accepted by the Health and Safety Executive (HSE). The International Liaison
Committee on Resuscitation (ILCOR) announced in 2008 that it had approved a universal AED sign, similar
to, but not the same as, the UK version.
All AEDs use voice prompts to guide rescuers, and are suitable for use by lay people or healthcare
providers. The majority are semi–automatic and prompt the operator to deliver the shock by pressing a
button. A fully–automatic AED will deliver a shock with no further intervention from the operator if it detects
that the heart rhythm is shockable.
189
ELEMENT 2 – Automated External Defibrillation (AED)
2.0 Guidelines for use of an AED

If an AED is not immediately available, CPR should be started at once and continued until an AED is
brought to the scene. If an AED is immediately available it should be used without delay.
1. As soon as the AED arrives:
• If more than one lifeguard is present, start or continue CPR whilst the AED is switched on. If you are
alone, stop CPR and switch on the AED
• Follow the voice and/or visual prompts
• Attach the electrode pads to the casualty’s bare chest
• Ensure that nobody touches the casualty while the AED is analysing the rhythm
Do not delay defibrillation to provide

additional CPR once the AED is ready.
2A. If a shock is indicated:

• Ensure that nobody touches the casualty
• Push the shock button as directed.
(Fully–automatic AEDs are designed to
deliver a shock without any further action by
the rescuer)
• Immediately resume CPR, beginning with
chest compressions, as guided by the
voice/visual prompts
• Minimise, as far as possible, any
interruptions in chest compressions
2B. If no shock is indicated:

• Immediately resume CPR using a ratio of 30
compressions to 2 rescue breaths
3. Continue as directed by the voice/visual

prompts:
• After a period of CPR (commonly 2 minutes)
the AED will prompt for a pause in CPR to
allow for rhythm analysis
4. Continue to follow the AED prompts until:

• A health professional tells you to stop
• You become exhausted
• The casualty is definitely waking up, moving, opening eyes and breathing normally
NPLQ Generation 9
2.1 Placement of AED pads
The casualty’s chest must be sufficiently exposed to
enable correct electrode pad placement. Chest hair
will prevent the pads adhering to the skin and will
interfere with electrical contact. Shave the chest only
if the hair is excessive, and even then spend as little
time as possible on this. Do not delay defibrillation if
a razor is not immediately available.
AEDs differ between manufactures, and users
should apply the pads according to the position
shown on the AED or on the pads.
Although most AED pads carry a picture of where
they should be placed, it does not matter if the left
and right pad are interchanged, but the positions on
the chest must remain the same. It is important to remember that if an ‘error’ is made, the pads should not
be removed and replaced as this wastes time and they may not stick adequately when re–attached.
If the chest is wet, quickly wipe it dry before attaching the AED pads.
Some casualties may have a heart pacemaker, which is usually visible just below the left collar bone and
unlikely to interfere with placing the pads. If, rarely, one is on the right–hand side, place the AED pads just
beside or just below it.
Remove any metal jewellery that might come into contact with the AED pads. Pads should be kept clear of
irremovable jewellery, including that used with body piercing.
Remove any plasters or other material attached to the casualty’s skin to ensure good AED pad contact.
Some casualty’s may have medication ‘patches’ on their chest wall. These must be removed as they can
cause sparking or burns during defibrillation.
2.2 Using an AED in a swimming pool

environment and if the casualty is wet
As long as no–one is touching the casualty when
a shock is delivered, there is no danger to the
rescuer or casualty, even if the casualty is lying on a
wet surface. If the casualty is wet, there is likely to
be a problem getting the AED pads to stick unless
the chest is dried.
AEDs carry an ‘immersion protection (IP) rating’
related to their suitability to be used in a wet
environment. Your operator will have checked that
the AED is suitable for use in the pool environment.
2.3 Use of oxygen

If the casualty is being given oxygen via a face mask, remove the mask and place it at least one metre
away from the casualty before delivering a shock to avoid the risk of explosion, but do not let this delay
giving the shock.
191
2.4 MINIMISING INTERRuPTIONS IN

ChEST COMPRESSIONS
It is very important to avoid interruption to CPR as much as possible, particularly chest compressions,
whilst using an AED. When two lifeguards are present, the one operating the AED should put on the
electrodes while the other continues CPR. The AED operator should deliver a shock as soon as the AED
advises, making sure that no one is in contact with the casualty.
Incident training with your lifeguard team will help you maintain high standards of CPR and ensure
minimal interruptions.
2.5 INFANTS AND ChILDREN

Standard adult AED pads are suitable for use in children older than eight years. Special paediatric pads
that reduce the current delivered during defibrillation should be used in infants and children if they are
available. If not, the AED should be used as it is.
In the unlikely event that the casualty is so small that adult pads cannot be placed in the standard chest
positions without touching each other, one pad should be placed on the upper part of the front of the
chest, and one in the corresponding position on the back.
2.6 SAFETy ISSuES whEN uSING AN AED

Do not touch the casualty during analysis, charging or the delivery of a shock as this may cause
movements that interfere with the AED’s ability to recognise the heart rhythm.
During rhythm analysis and before delivery of a shock, shout ‘stand clear’ and check visually that no one,
including bystanders, touches the casualty.
It is possible and safe to use an AED on a casualty with a suspected spinal injury, whether on or off a
rescue board. It is important to remember that everyone must stand clear of the casualty when instructed
to by the AED. This includes the lifeguard providing stabilisation of the casualty’s head, neck and spine.
NPLQ Generation 9
2.7 What to store with the AED
It is helpful to store the following items with an AED:
• Small towel or face flannel
• Razor
• Pocket Mask
• Protective gloves
• Scissors suitable to cut through clothing
Some Operators may choose to also include:
• Spare battery/batteries
• Spare pads
• Paediatric pads
2.8 AED Flow Charts
Unresponsive and not breathing normally
Call 999/112 and ask for an ambulance
AED
No Yes
Available
Continue 30 chest Turn on AED

compressions followed by Listen to and follow the
2 rescue breaths voice prompts
193

1. What does an AED do?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. What are the benefits of an AED?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. When the AED analyses the heart what is it looking for?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. Why might you need a towel when using an AED?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. When would you turn the AED off?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. Can you use an AED on a casualty with a suspected spinal injury?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. What equipment should you keep with an AED?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
NPLQ Generation 9
ELEMENT 3 – FIRST AID
First Aid Survey

100 leisure centres were surveyed over 2 years. Accidents were recorded detailing the age of
the casualty, the location and activity at the time of the accident and treatment given.
The data helps RLSS UK to ensure that the content of this section prepare a lifeguard for
accidents that may occur in the leisure centres they may work in.
Over the 2 year period:
• 11332 accidents were reported in total
• 5341 accidents occurred in the swimming pool hall
• 990 accidents occurred in swimming pool toilets and changing rooms
• 8472 casualties were under 18 and 3639 of those were under 8
• 5597 ice packs were used
• 348 bandages were applied
• 1990 plasters were applied
• sugary food/drink was given to 32 casualties
• eye wash was used on 38 occasions
So what does that mean to you:

Accident are highly likely within swimming pool halls, toilets and changing rooms within
leisure centres.
Children are the most common type of casualties.
What we will cover

First aid is the initial care or treatment given to
a person who becomes ill or injured. It is the
application of acceptable basic lifesaving skills
and first aid knowledge to care for the casualty
until more qualified help arrives. It should
always be given according to the procedures
set out in the EAP.
Your employer will know the most recent legislation
governing the way we deal with children and
vulnerable adults, and should make you fully aware

of what is expected of you.
3.0 Priorities of first aid

When giving first aid, the aims are to:
• Preserve life
• Alleviate suffering
• Prevent the situation getting worse
• Promote casualty recovery
195
ELEMENT 3 – First Aid
3.1 NOP relevant content –

First Aid Supplies and Training
First–aid Your employer will have developed a As a lifeguard it is highly likely that you
supplies and procedure for First Aid arrangements at will be called upon to administer first
training your facility. They are required to: aid to a customer or a colleague.
• Make adequate first aid provision for It is essential that you strictly follow
employees your training.
• Provide first aid training for an If you use the first aid kit, it essential
appropriate number of employees, as that you inform the designated officer
determined by the outcome of a risk what you used, and, therefore what
assessment needs to be replaced in the first aid
• Inform employees of the arrangements box.
made, including the location of first aid You must always use any protective
equipment, facilities and personnel equipment made available when
• Take account of the presence of non– administering first aid and follow the
employees, if appropriate, customers. procedures set out, in particular with
So as a minimum the NOP will include: regard to the use of sharps or issues of
• First aiders & training contamination.
Who is the duty first aider All accidents/incidents must be
Contact systems recorded and this will, as a minimum,
Records of training include:
• Equipment • What happened?
Location • Where did it happen?
Checking • When did it happen?
Stock control and ordering
• What was the casualty doing at the
• Eye wash stations time of the accident/incident?
Location
• How did it happen?
• Sharps kit
• Details of the injured person
Location
Use – safety procedures • What was the injury?
Disposal • What first aid was administered?
• Body fluid kit • Who administered the first aid?
How to use • What happened next? e.g. did the
Contents casualty attend hospital?
Safety It is essential that you record this
location information accurately.
Disposal
• Links with emergency services
• Location of accident forms and
reporting
Who completes and how to
complete
Location of forms
Recording of accident location
Importance of accurate information
How forms may be used for
potential defence of claims
NPLQ Generation 9
3.2 Contents of a First Aid box
First aid kits will vary and should be based on an assessment of hazards within the workplace, to ensure
the kit meets the needs of each specific working environment. First aid kits come in various sizes with
different quantities of equipment for different number of employees within a workplace. Detailed below is
example contents for a medium first aid kit:
Guidance leaflet 1
Contents list 1
Large sterile dressing 2
Medium sterile dressing 6
Triangular bandage 3
Safety pins 12
Eye pad sterile dressing 3
Adhesive sterile dressings 60
Alcohol–free moist cleaning wipes 30
Adhesive tape 1
Nitrile disposable gloves 9
Sterile finger dressing 3
Resuscitation face shield/mask including one–way valve 1
Foil blanket 2
Burn dressing 2
Shears suitable for cutting clothing, including leather 1
Conforming bandage 2
It is essential to restock the first aid box with any items that have been used to ensure it is ready for
any future first aid use.
DO NOT LEAVE YOUR FELLOW LIFEGUARD/TEAM MEMBERS
SHORT OF EQUIPMENT IN AN EMERGENCY.
Apart from the contents detailed above first aid

boxes should not contain:
• Pills
• Medicines
• Sprays
• Creams
• Sharp scissors
• Cotton wool
• Inhalers
197
3.3 Hygiene procedures.

Before assessing the condition of the casualty,
there are a few things to be addressed. Your safety,
the safety of other members of the team and your
hygiene are essential requirements before you get
involved in a first aid situation – no matter how
minor the situation may seem.
When dealing with a casualty, where possible you
should wear protective gloves to help protect you
and the casualty and, where practicable, an apron.
Always wash your hands before and after dealing
with a casualty, and for your safety – and the
casualty’s. Make sure any exposed cuts or breaks
in your own skin are covered with a waterproof
dressing, especially on your arms and hands.
Some people have an allergic reaction to the latex
in many types of protective gloves. If you are prone
to skin irritations, you should ask your employer to
make latex free gloves available.
Avoid touching the wound or any part of a dressing which might be in contact with the wound, and do not
talk or cough, or sneeze close to a wound or dressing.
The centre’s Pool Safety Operating Procedures (PSOP) will specify disinfection and cleaning procedures for
bodily fluids and blood on poolside.
3.4 Needles and sharps

The centre will detail arrangements for handling needles and sharps in
the PSOP and you will need to be trained prior to being able to deal with
needles or sharp medical items.
Many centres will have a sharps disposal kit for your protection that will
include a sharps container, that can safely store needles prior to incineration
and safe disposal.
In the case of treatment for anaphylaxis (if you are trained) you will need to
dispose of the auto-injector using a needles and sharps container.
NPLQ Generation 9
3.5 History, symptoms and signs – Applying
First Aid (treatment)
History Symptoms Signs
Applying First Aid
History – It is important to find out what

happened leading up to the accident/incident.
If casualties are conscious, they can give
you the necessary information, but if they are
unconscious, ask witnesses or bystanders. Look
at where the casualties are and check for medical
factors such as previous medical history or
information on a medic alert bracelet. The position
of surrounding equipment and the condition of the
ground may give you more clues as to what might
have happened.
Symptoms – what the casualty tells you

As examples they may describe stiffness, loss of feeling, tenderness, pain or temperature.
Signs – something you can see, hear or feel

As examples there may be bruising, an obvious problem with a joint or limb, respiratory failure or bleeding;
in other words, something that you can actually see.
Applying First Aid – treatment

Using symptoms, signs and history will help you to decide how best to apply first aid. Sometimes it might
be immediately obvious that a particular injury has been sustained, but a secondary survey may still be
necessary to make sure no other injuries have been sustained. In all situations remember the primary
survey and the need to check that there is no danger to yourself, bystanders and the casualty. Treat
casualties with the most life threatening injuries first.
Unless otherwise stated in the first aid treatment information, it is important not to give a casualty food or
drink as this may cause a delay in the ability for medical aid to be given by the emergency and medical
services. Also do not allow the casualty to smoke.
Consent to give First Aid

Where possible, always ask the casualty’s permission prior to administrating first aid. If a casualty does not
allow you to touch them and they need emergency help you should call for emergency help 999/112.
Touching someone without their consent could be deemed as assault.
In situations where the casualty is unconscious you are not expected to obtain consent.
199
3.6 Taking emergency Action

When supervising the pool, if you are required to give first aid your ability to watch the pool is
compromised. Always call upon your team members to support you to enable adequate supervision to
continue, whilst first aid is administered. If the casualty’s injury or condition is serious, implement the EAP
and alert the lifeguard team.
3.7 Seeking emergency help

Regardless of how well someone seems to be recovering, do not hesitate to get emergency help by calling
999/112 if you are in any doubt at all about their condition or injury. Some leisure centres may require you
to dial a number to get an outside line or have a direct dial or phone to contact emergency services.
Give as much information as possible to emergency services who take over care of the casualty. This
information is essential including location, incident details, number of casualties, and extent of injuries.
3.8 Casualty Management

We assess a casualty to find out how bad their injuries are, and to help us understand how they were
caused. Assessing the casualty is divided into two parts:
• Primary Survey
• Secondary Survey
3.8.1 Primary Survey

The Primary Survey is concerned with assessing the casualty for life threatening injuries and taking
immediate and appropriate action at each stage:
Danger – is there any danger to yourself or the casualty?
Response – does the casualty respond?
Airway – is the airway open and clear?
Breathing – is the casualty breathing normally?
Circulation – is there any severe bleeding?
If there are no life–threatening conditions, they are under control or none are present, move onto the
secondary survey.
3.8.2 Secondary Survey

The Secondary Survey involves determining the background to an injury, assessing the mechanics of the
injury, looking for signs and determining symptoms and conducting a thorough examination of the casualty.
This will be covered in more detail later in this section.
NPLQ Generation 9
3.9 Unconscious Casualty
Loss of consciousness can be caused by:
• Reduced supply of blood to the brain for example, from a faint, from suffocation, heart attack, stroke
or shock
• Head injury
• Poisoning or drugs
• Effects of extremes of temperature
• Drowning or some other form of asphyxiation, for example a sweet blocking the airway
• Seizures, epilepsy or a diabetic emergency
Symptoms
As the casualty is unconscious, they will be unable to tell you any of their symptoms.
Signs
An altered level of consciousness can be anything from slight drowsiness or confusion to a deep coma, in
which the casualty is totally unresponsive.
One of the easiest ways to decide whether or not someone is unconscious is to shake them very gently
and talk to them. Ask if they are awake or if they can hear you, but be careful not to cause any unnecessary
movement so any injury, particularly to their neck, is not made worse.
Treatment
The basic treatment is as follows:
• Complete primary survey and give CPR if required
• Treat any major bleeding and remove or treat any obvious, immediate cause of unconsciousness
• If they are unconscious due to an accident (not sudden collapse or drowning) or where there is the
possibility of injuries, complete a secondary survey and treat any injuries
• Loosen the clothing at their neck, chest and waist
• Protect them from cold and wet conditions
• Place the unconscious casualty in the recovery position if you are sure they are breathing normally
• Continue to monitor the casualty’s conscious state and recheck breathing
• Record any changes in condition at regular intervals and pass on the information to the paramedics
when they take control of the situation
If consciousness returns, reassure them but don’t give them anything to eat or drink.
201
3.10 Heart Attack

A heart attack occurs if there is some interruption in the blood supply to the heart itself such as a blood
vessel becoming blocked resulting in the heart muscle being starved of oxygen.
Symptoms
• Dizzyness, nausea
• Severe crushing or tightening sensation/
pain in chest
• Tingling sensation/pain in left arm, may
spread to jaw or other areas
• May confuse with feeling of indigestion
• Rapid, weak or irregular pulse
• Feeling of impending doom
• Anxiety
Signs
• Pale grey skin
• Coughing
• Blue tinge to skin and lips
• Sweaty skin
• Casualty may find breathing difficult
• Clutching chest
• Sudden collapse
Treatment
• Call 999/112 for emergency help
• Assist the casualty in to a comfortable position (a half-sitting position is often best)
• Loosen tight clothing around the waist and neck
• Ask the casualty if they have any medication and if so, advise them to use as prescribed
• Reassure the casualty
• If possible, remove any causes of stress or anxiety
• Monitor the casualty
• Be prepared to perform CPR if the casualty stops breathing
Lifeguards should encourage and assist the casualty in the self-administration of 300mg chewable aspirin
as soon as possible after the onset of chest pain (ask the casualty if they are allergic to aspirin).
First Aid at Work does not advise giving tablets or medicines to treat illness. The only exception to this is
where aspirin is used when giving first aid to a casualty with a suspected heart attack, in accordance with
currently accepted first–aid practice. It is recommended that tablets and medicines should not be kept in
the first aid box.
HSE First Aid at Work regulations state:

Some casualties may carry their own medication that has been prescribed by their doctor (e.g. an inhaler
for asthma). If an individual needs to take their own prescribed medication, the first aider’s role is generally
limited to helping them do so and contacting the emergency services as appropriate.*
*Current HSE advice at time of print
NPLQ Generation 9
3.11 Shock
Shock is a failure of the circulation, which leads to an inadequate supply of blood to vital organs. So shock
means there is not enough blood being pumped round the body and vital organs.
The medical definition of shock has very little to do with the way we tend to use the word in normal
circumstances. Medically, it is a serious condition and needs urgent qualified medical attention.
The circulatory system can fail to maintain sufficient blood flow for a number of reasons, including:
• Low blood volume – normally due to bleeding (Hypovolemic shock)
• Loss of bodily fluids – for example due to severe vomiting, diarrhoea, burns, blood loss or severe
dehydration (Hypovolemic shock)
• Low cardiac output – not enough blood being pumped round the body by the heart (Cardiogenic Shock)
When our circulation fails, essential parts of our body such as the brain, kidneys and heart, don’t get as
much oxygen as they need and so they cannot function properly. In extreme cases, this can be fatal.
The body tries to compensate for the lack of circulating blood by:
• Drawing the remaining blood away from the skin and directing it to more important areas
• Increasing the rate of breathing to get as much oxygen as possible into the blood
• Speeding up the heart to circulate the blood more rapidly
Symptoms
• Dizzyness
• Confused
• Disorientated
• Nauseous
• Thirst
Signs
The signs of shock result from
lack of oxygen and the body’s
attempt to compensate for this.
• Pale, cold clammy skin
• Blueness of lips and
extremities
• Weak rapid pulse
• Rapid, shallow breathing
• Unconsciousness
Treatment
• Assist the casualty to lie down, raise the casualty’s legs where possible/injuries permit
• Loosen tight clothing around the neck, chest and waist
• Treat the cause of shock where possible

• Keep them warm to prevent heat loss
• Monitor the casualty
• Do not give them food or drink
203
3.12 Breathing problems

3.12.1 Asthma Attack
When the muscles of the air passages go into
spasm and narrow the airway, this and the
accumulation of mucus in the airway, causes
shortness of breath and wheezing. People are
usually quite well between attacks, which may start
suddenly and pass just as quickly.
People with asthma usually carry medication to
open up the airway during an attack.
They should bring their medication to the poolside.
Do not accept responsibility for the safe
keeping of inhalers or any other medication
Symptoms and Signs
• Breathing difficulties
• Wheezy breathlessness
Signs
• Anxiety (which could have brought on the
attack)
• Difficulty in speaking
• Pale and clammy grey or blue lips
Treatment
• Sit them in a comfortable position
• Encourage and assist them to use their
prescribed medication (reliever inhaler)
• If they have a spacer device assist them to
put it together and use it with the inhaler
• The inhaler should be used again if the attack
does not ease
• Remove from the cause if known (e.g. dusty
room, fumes)
• Cold winter air can make an attack worse; do
not take the casualty outside in cold air
Call 999/112 for emergency help when:

• The casualty goes unconscious
• An attack is severe
• An attack lasts for longer than normal
• Medication does not help
• The person becomes very distressed or exhausted
NPLQ Generation 9
3.12.2 Anaphylaxis
This is a serious, potentially fatal condition caused by a severe allergic reaction. In allergic individuals,
anaphylaxis can develop within a few seconds or minutes following contact with any substance that they
are allergic to.
Triggers for Anaphylaxis:

A trigger is something that can cause an action or situation,
in this case anaphylaxis:
• Foods – nuts, milk, fish, shellfish, egg
• Medicines – general anaesthetic, aspirin
• Insect stings – in particular wasps, bee stings
• Latex – types of rubber found in some rubber gloves
Symptoms and Signs

• Swollen tongue
• Hoarse voice
• Difficulty swallowing
• Difficult or noisy breathing
• Wheeze or persistence cough
• Abdominal pain, nausea and vomiting
• Anaphylactic shock
Other Symptoms
These symptoms can also occur on their own, without the more severe ones. Where that is the case, the
reaction is likely to be less serious but you should watch carefully in case any of the more severe ones
develop.
• Swelling of the hands, feet, face or skin (angioedema)
• Red itchy rash or raised areas of skin (hives or urticaria)
• Widespread flushing of the skin
• Anxiety/panic, feeling of terror
An allergic individual may be wearing a

Medic Alert bracelet
Anaphylaxis can also cause life threatening problems to the

casualty’s airways, breathing and/ or circulation:
• Airways – swelling of the lips, throat, tongue, stridor
(a high–pitched wheezing sound)
• Breathing – breathing difficulties, wheezy sound,
fatigue, confusion
• Circulation – the casualty’s blood vessels may start to
dilate which could cause them to become weak, floppy,

faint, pale, clammy and drowsy
205
Treatment
• Ask the casualty if they have their auto injector* with them e.g. EpiPen®, Jext®, Emerade®
• The casualty should administer their own medication as prescribed, adults will generally self–medicate
and the parent or guardian will most likely medicate a child
• Call 999/112 for emergency help following the use of the first device, even if there is immediate
improvement or if further devices are available. The emergency service operator must be told the
person is suffering from anaphylaxis and needs to be attended by paramedics
• If the casualty has difficulty breathing they may prefer to sit up which may make breathing easier
• If the casualty feels faint lay them down immediately and raise their legs
• If the casualty’s condition deteriorates after making the initial 999/112 call, a second call to the
emergency services should be made to ensure an ambulance has been dispatched
• A second dose of medication should be administered if there is no improvement within 5 minutes or if
symptoms return
• Monitor the casualty’s breathing and prepare to give CPR if required
• An unconscious casualty who you are sure is breathing normally should be placed in the recovery
position and breathing monitored
*an adrenaline auto–injector is an injection that is administered into the casualty’s thigh (mid, upper, outer).
3.12.3 Using an Adrenaline Auto–injector

Using an adrenaline auto–injector requires training, it is important someone who may have to administer
the device has received training.
Adrenaline auto–injectors
An adrenaline auto–injector is a medical device designed to deliver a dose of adrenaline. They are like
spring–loaded syringes with a needle to pierce the skin and ensure the medication goes into a muscle.
Adrenaline auto–injectors are easy to use and are intended for self–administration by patients, or
administration by someone who has received training.
In the UK there are 3 brands of adrenaline auto–injectors for the treatment of anaphylaxis; Emerade®,
EpiPen® & Jext®
Emerade® EpiPen®
Jext® – 150 Micrograms (patients 15–30kg) Jext® – 300 Micrograms (patients 30kg +)
NPLQ Generation 9
Medication
It is important before administering medication that the following are checked:
• Is the medication correct for the casualty?
• Is it the correct dose? (adrenaline auto–injector will display the dosage)
Routine checking of medication is also important and would include:
• Is the medication prescribed to the person you are treating?
• Is it damaged?
• Is it in date?
Safe use of an Adrenaline auto–injector

All adrenaline auto injectors are very similar and are administered into the mid upper outer thigh. You do
not need to remove any clothing; however, you do need to be aware of zips, buckles or anything that may
be in the casualty’s pocket.
It is always important to check the instructions on the side of the casualty’s device to ensure it is being
administered correctly.
Before applications:
• Locate the medication
• Position the casualty (sat upright or lay down with their legs elevated)
• Check injection site (ensure there are no zips, buckles or anything that will get in the way)
• Follow the instructions on the adrenaline auto–injector
To use an auto–injector:
1. Hold in dominant hand
EpiPen Jext Emerade
2. Prepare auto–injector
EpiPen Jext Emerade
Remove blue safety cap Remove yellow safety cap Remove the needle shield
207
3. Administer auto–injector into MID UPPER OUTSIDE THIGH
EpiPen Jext Emerade
Swing from 10 cms away and Push the tip of the auto–injector Press the tip of the auto-injector
jab the tip into the thigh into the thigh into the thigh
4. Hold the auto–injector in place for:

EpiPen – 3 seconds Jext – 10 seconds Emerade – 5 seconds
5. Massage the injection site for 10 seconds

Jext Emerade
6. Ensure 999/112 has been called

7. Reassure and monitor the casualty. Repeat dose can be administered 5 minutes
later if there is no improvement or if the signs and symptoms return.
Ensure that auto-injectors are disposed of in the correct way (see needles and sharps section)
Hand Over
When the health professional arrives, you must ensure you provide a detailed hand over
What do you think this would include?
• Casualties name
• What happened?
• What first aid was administered?
• Have you used one or two auto injectors?
• Has the casualty remained conscious throughout?
NPLQ Generation 9
3.12.4 Hyperventilation
Hyperventilation is excessive breathing often a
result of a panic attack. It does however occur in
swimming pools either when a swimmer is planning
to swim a distance underwater and breathes
excessively before they submerge, or it sometimes
can be brought on by a novice swimmer about to
enter the water for a race who thinks that by taking
large fast breaths that it will help them swim faster.
Hyperventilation does not increase the oxygen
content in the blood; rather it reduces the level
of carbon dioxide which, in turn, takes away the
desire to breathe. Physical activity then uses up the
oxygen in the blood before the carbon dioxide level
reaches the point where normal breathing starts
again. The swimmer runs out of oxygen and loses
consciousness before feeling the need to breathe.
Symptoms:
• Dizziness or feeling faint
• Cramps in hands and feet
• Pins and needles in the hands and arms
• Tight chest
• Panic
• Rapid pulse
Signs:
• Unnaturally fast, deep breathing
• Flushed skin
Treatment:
• Remove casualty to quiet area, away from crowds and bystanders (if possible)
• Reassure the casualty but also be calm but firm
• Encourage the casualty to take slow breaths through their nose
• Where possible give the casualty small sips of water which will reduce their breathing
• Call 999/112 for emergency help if the attack if prolonged
3.13 Dressings and Bandages

A dressing is used to be placed on a wound to control bleeding, prevent infection and absorb any
discharge. They should be sterile, absorbent and the gauze large enough to cover the skin beyond the
wound. Bandages come in a range of sizes.
Triangular bandages are used to make a sling, hold other bandages in place, provide support and to
restrict movement of or immobilise an injured limb.
Sticking plasters are small self–adhesive dressings that should always be individually wrapped and sealed.
Application
Always place dressings straight onto the wound. If bleeding is under control, clean the wound and
surrounding skin first and then apply the dressing.
Once a dressing has been applied, particularly on upper limbs, check the circulation to make sure the
dressing is not too tight.
Where there is a foreign body protruding from the wound, apply pressure with a dressing around the
foreign body and not directly on top of it. NEVER remove anything that is sticking out of a wound.
209
3.14 bLEEDING
Bleeding can be external from a cut, or internal following a severe blow. Losing blood reduces the amount
of oxygen that is carried to vital organs. Severe bleeding can cause shock and ultimately death.
Bleeding can be from:
• Capillaries – the blood will trickle out normally seen with grazes and small cuts
• Veins – the blood will ooze out
• Artery – the blood will spurt out, a severed artery can lead to significant and rapid blood loss leading
to shock and death
Severity of bleeding
SEvERE
Artery
Veins
Capillaries
MILD
Type of Wound and Appearance
Bruise (contusion) Graze (abrasion) Clean cut or slice (incision)
Tear or rip (laceration) Stabbing (puncture) Gun shot
NPLQ Generation 9
3.14.1 Minor Injuries
Minor injuries are common and require simple treatment.
Small cuts
Treatment:
• Irrigate thoroughly with clean water to remove
any dirt
• Dry the wound with a sterile dressing and apply
an adhesive plaster or sterile dressing
Grazes
Treatment:
• Irrigate thoroughly with clean water to remove
any dirt and grit
• Dry the wound with a sterile dressing and apply
an adhesive plaster or sterile dressing
Bruises
Treatment:
• To reduce swelling use a ice pack wrapped in a
clean cloth (triangle bandage can be used)
• Apply an ice pack to bruise for no longer than
. 20 minutes
211
3.14.2 External Bleeding

Symptoms
• Pain in the affected area
• Shock
• Thirst
• Weak but rapid pulse
Signs
External bleeding is usually obvious but a quick
examination of the whole casualty, including any
necessary removal of clothing, helps to make sure
no hidden bleeding is missed.
Treatment
A dressing should be large enough to cover
the wound. A firmly applied dressing with direct
pressure is sufficient to stem bleeding from the
majority of minor wounds but should not restrict
blood flow.
• Wear protective gloves
• Lay or sit the casualty down in a
comfortable position
• Call 999/112 for emergency help in all but
minor cases
• Examine the wound and check for
foreign objects
• Apply direct pressure to the wound preferably
using a sterile dressing
Or if no dressings are available then use your
(or the casualty’s) fingers or hand
• Treat the casualty for shock
If the bleeding does not stop, remove the dressing
and re-apply direct pressure over a new dressing
to control the bleeding. Secure the dressing with a
bandage once the bleeding has been controlled.
For severe bleeding, or bleeding that is not controlled by direct pressure, consider applying a haemostatic
dressing, only if you have been trained in their use. If the bleeding remains severe, consider using a
tourniquet, again ONLY if you have been trained in their safe use.
If there is an embedded object in the wound in
addition to the above:
• Do not remove the object unless it is a splinter
as this may cause further damage and may
increase bleeding
• Build up sterile dressings around the
embedded object to apply pressure to help
reduce bleeding and support the object
NPLQ Generation 9
3.14.3 Internal Bleeding
Symptoms and Signs
Internal bleeding is harder to see. Look out for:
• Skin becoming pale, cold and clammy
• Confusion, restlessness that may lead to a collapse and unconsciousness
• Bruising, and particularly, pattern bruising at the point of impact or swelling
• Shock without any loss of bleeding
• Thirst
• Weak but rapid pulse
Treatment
• Lie the casualty down
• Treat for shock
3.14.4 Varicose Vein Bleed

Veins in the legs have a one–way valve to make sure the blood going back to the heart only flows in one
direction. If one of these valves fails, blood collects behind it and this is easily damaged by a knock against
something such as a chair or a table leg. The blood may squirt and appear quite alarming.
Treatment
• Help the casualty to lie down
• Apply firm, direct pressure on the injury, using a sterile dressing until the bleeding is under control
• Secure another dressing over the first, ensuring evenly distributed pressure
• Recheck the limb every 10 minutes
3.14.5 Amputation
A limb that has been partially or completely severed
from the body is called an amputation. It is essential to
look after the amputated part carefully to improve the
chances of it being re–attached in hospital.
Symptoms
As for bleeding
Signs
As for bleeding
Treatment
As for bleeding
For severe bleeding, or bleeding that is not controlled by direct pressure, consider applying a haemostatic
dressing, only if you have been trained in their use. If the bleeding remains severe, consider using a
tourniquet, again ONLY if you have been trained in their safe use.
Protect the amputated part by wrapping it in a plastic bag or cling ﬁlm then with a soft cloth (a bandage will
do) cover with ice or cold pack.
DO NOT LET THE AMPUTATED PART COME INTO CONTACT WITH ICE OR WATER
213
3.14.6 Bleeding from the Nose

Some people get nosebleeds quite often and it is more of a
nuisance than a danger. Bleeding may also be caused by a
bang on the nose or violent sneezing and some casualties
lose a lot of blood. High blood pressure or anti clotting
medication may also be a cause of a nose bleed.
If the blood is thin and watery and follows a head injury this
could indicate a skull fracture and is potentially very serious.
Symptoms
• Pain if from an impact
If there is excessive blood loss:
• Dizziness
• Weakness
• Confusion
• Feeling faint
Signs
• Bleeding from the nose
Treatment
• Sit the casualty down with their head tilted forward
• Ask them to breathe through their mouth
• Apply pressure to the soft tissue on both sides of
the nose just below the bridge – the casualty might
be able to do this for themselves
• Ask the casualty to try not to speak, swallow,
cough or sniff, as this could dislodge the newly
formed blood clot
• Apply pressure for 10 minutes at a time
• If the bleeding is severe or lasts more than 30
minutes, call 999/112 for emergency help
3.15 SPLINTERS
Small objects that pierce the skin such as glass, wood (sometimes thorns from plants) or any small sharp
object that has pierced the skin are called splinters. Where a splinter is of a small nature they can usually
be removed using tweezers. If a splinter is difficult to remove, goes very deep, lies over a joint or is large
(see embedded object page 212) it should be left where it is with the casualty advised to seek medical
help. As splinters are often dirty they can be a cause of infection where the skin is broken.
Symptoms
• Minor pain / irritation
Signs
• Visible splinter
Treatment
• Wear protective gloves
• Clean the area around the splinter
• Use tweezers to grab the splinter as close to the
skin as possible to reduce the chance of it breaking
• Pull the splinter out in the same direction as it entered the skin
• Once the splinter has been removed, gently squeeze to allow the site to bleed slightly.
This can help reduce the likelihood of infection by cleaning the wound
• Cover with a dressing after cleaning and drying the wound
NPLQ Generation 9
3.16 Burns and scalds
Examples of how burns can be caused:
• Dry heat (hot surface, fire, friction burns)
• Wet heat (Steam, hot liquid)
• Chemical
• Electrical
• Sunburn
Symptoms
• Pain in the area of the burn
• Serious burns may cause little pain because
the whole thickness of the skin, including the
nerves, has been destroyed
• Shock e.g. if a large area of the body has
been burned, the loss of fluid leads to shock
• Breathing difficulties if the airway is affected
Signs
• Blistering
• Swelling
• Redness
• Clear fluid on affected area
• Signs of shock
Treatment
• Flood the affected area with cool or cold
water (not freezing) for at least 20 minutes* or
until the pain is relieved
• If clothing is stuck to the affected area, do not
try to remove it as you could cause further
damage
• Remove any rings, watches or jewellery
carefully before the injured area starts to swell
• To prevent infection cover the burn with a
non–adhesive, sterile dressing. Where available
loosely applied cling film should be used
• Treat the casualty for shock
*beware of causing hypothermia when cooling
large burns, especially in the young and elderly
• Call 999/112 for emergency help if:
the casualty is a child or elderly

it appears to be severe or you are unsure
about the extent of a burn
the casualty has inhaled smoke or fumes from a chemical leak
the casualty has suffered an electrical burn
burns involve the face, feet, hands or genitals
burns extend around a limb e.g. arm or leg
a partial-thickness burn is greater than an area the size of the palm of the casualty’s hand (one
percent of the body surface)
Apart from using an approved burn dressing from the first aid kit, DO NOT use creams, oils
or lotions on any part of the burn. Under no circumstances should you burst blisters as
this can cause infection.
215
3.16.1 Severity of Burns

When a casualty sustains a burn, skin is burnt. There are 3 layers of skin, outer layer (epidermis), dermis
and the final layer containing nerves, fat tissue, muscles and blood vessels.
Burns are classified according to the depth of skin damage.
Superficial Partial thickness Full thickness

Outer layer (epidermis) of Outer layer (epidermis) and All layers of skin burnt. This
skin burnt. dermis are burnt. could include nerves, fat tissue,
muscles and blood vessels.
The skin will appear The skin will be red and raw
red, tender and swelling may with blisters appearing due It may look charred or waxy.
begin. to the fluid released from the Pain may be absent if nerve
damaged tissue below. endings have been involved.
Severe burns include some of the following:

• Depth of burn – A deep burn affecting all layers of skin
• Location of burn – A burn that cover the feet, hands, face, genitals or extends around a limb
• Size of burn – A burn that covers an area greater than the size of the casualty’s palm of their hand
• Cause of burn – A burn from a chemical or electricity
3.16.2 Sunburn
Sunburn occurs when the skin burns and/or blisters from ultraviolet rays (sun/sun beds). When combined
with windy conditions, can cause severe burns.
Symptoms
• Itching and tenderness of the skin
• Pain
• Dizzy
• Symptoms of shock
Signs
• Redness to skin
• Blisters
• Burns
• Wetness or sweat to skin
Treatment
• Move the casualty to shade
• Give sips of cold water
• Cool the burn with cool or cold water (not freezing) for up to 20 minutes or until the pain is relieved
• Call 999/112 for emergency help if the burning is severe
NPLQ Generation 9
3.17 Electric shock
Dealing with electrical emergencies can be extremely dangerous and must be carried out according to
the procedures set out in the EAP to ensure your safety.
For outdoor pools, this may include a lightning strike.
Contact with electricity can result in:
• Unconsciousness
• Spasm of the respiratory muscles so that breathing stops
• Cardiac arrest (as the shock can interrupt the normal rhythm of the heart)
• Burns at entry and exit points
Symptoms
• Pain
• Symptoms of shock
Signs
• See casualty jolt/shake/jump
• Burns
• Signs of shock
• Unconsciousness
• Difficulty/no breathing
Treatment
• Isolate the power by turning off the mains supply, ideally at the consumer unit
• Do not touch the casualty with anything metal or wet until power is isolated
Once the electrical supply has been isolated:

• Complete a primary survey and if needed start CPR
• Treat burns
• Treat casualty for shock
• If the casualty is unconscious and you are sure they are breathing normally, place them in the
recovery position and monitor breathing
217
3.18 Fractures
Slips and trips on wet pool floors happen a lot in swimming pools, and the consequence of a fall onto a
hard surface can be quite serious causing one of a number of injuries.
Types of Fractures:
• Open fracture: an exposed wound leads down to a fracture or the ends of the broken bone might
stick out through the skin
• Closed fracture: the skin is not broken but there might be bruising, swelling and deformity
• Complicated fracture: associated with either open or closed fractures, this is where there is an
injury to major blood vessels, brain, lungs, nerves, liver, joints or other parts of the body
• Greenstick: is generally more common in young children who have more flexible bones. This type of
fracture can easily be confused with a sprain or a strain as not all of the symptoms of a fracture are
always present
Symptoms
• Pain is common, however it is not always severe
• The injured area is hard to move and generally painful
Signs
• Cracking sounds can be heard at the time of injury
• Bleeding can be seen where a fracture is open
• Swelling and deformity can usually be seen, particularly when you compare one side of the body with
the other
Treatment
• Keep casualty in the position in which they were found, move only if absolutely necessary
• Immobilisation or support to reduce the potential of further damage to the injury by
support upper limbs by hand or with a sling
support lower limbs with pads of blankets, clothing or similar soft materials
• Cover any exposed wound with a sterile dressing
if an open fracture, apply a dressing to the wound taking care not to put direct pressure on any
exposed bone
In the case of a suspected fractured skull – see head injury.
NPLQ Generation 9
3.19 Slings
Support Sling
A support sling supports and immobilises an injured arm, wrist or ribs. This can only be used for
casualties who can bend their elbow.
Elevation Sling
The elevation sling supports the arm and hand in a raised position. This will help to minimise swelling, it
could also be used to support the arm in cases of shoulder injuries.
219
3.20 Dislocation
Dislocation happens when a bone or joint is displaced and it is often associated with ligament and muscle
damage. It is a very painful injury requiring gentle first aid management.
Symptoms
• A feeling of nausea is also a characteristic of a dislocation due to the pain and can lead to shock
Signs
• Casualties will be reluctant to try to move the affected joint because of the pain which is severe in
most cases
• The injured area is usually quite obviously deformed and may start to swell very soon after the injury
Treatment
• Allow the casualty to find the most comfortable position for themselves
• Support the injured limb in that position with padding and/or bandages
• Do not try to relocate the joint or aggravate the injury
• Do not allow the casualty to eat or drink
When rescued from the water, be really careful in helping the casualty onto the poolside.
3.21 Sprains and strains

These are often called ‘soft tissue injuries’ because they affect the ligaments and the muscles.
Sprains
Sprains happen at joints where ligaments have
been wrenched.
Symptoms
• The casualty will complain of pain and
difficulty in moving
Signs
• Swelling may occur soon after the injury
• Bruising
• Discolouration
Strains
Strains occur if muscles are over–stretched.
Symptoms
• The casualty will complain of localised but
intense pain at the site of the injury
Signs
• If it occurs in a limb, there may be obvious
swelling
• The injury may also result in severe cramp
NPLQ Generation 9
Treatment for sprain or strain
Treatment follows the RICE principle:
Rest: Rest the affected limb or joint and make
the casualty comfortable i.e. do not allow the
swimmer back into the pool.
Ice: Apply an ice pack as soon as possible to
the injured area as this will reduce swelling. Wrap
ice pack in a clean piece of fabric or material to
protect the skin (a triangular bandage would be
suitable). Do this for no longer than 20 minutes.
Comfortable Position: Provide comfortable
support.
Elevation: Elevate the affected area as this can
also aid the reduction of swelling.
If the RICE principle is applied properly and promptly

this can help reduce the effect of the injury and also
help improve the recovery of the casualty.
3.22 CRAMP
Cramp is a sudden, involuntary and painful
contraction of a muscle. It may be caused by
sudden or unusual exercise, a blow or injury to
the muscle, excessive loss of salt, from severe
sweating, and dehydration. Many cases, however,
occur without an obvious trigger factor.
Symptoms
• Swimmer cannot relax muscle
• Pain in a muscle
Signs
• Muscle will feel hard and tight
Treatment
• Support the casualty as appropriate
• Stretch the muscle by carefully and gently
straightening the affected muscle
• Cramp can often be relieved by
massaging the area

• Rest should be taken before further activity
221
3.23 Head Injuries

Head injuries can cause serious injury, dizziness,
confusion and unconsciousness. There are
several types of head injuries; concussion,
compression or skull fracture. Concussion
Concussion is where a casualty may have an
altered level of consciousness, be disorientated,
be confused, have a lack of ability to remember or
briefly go unconscious after a blow or other injury
to the head.
Compression is a potentially fatal condition

where there is pressure to the brain from either a
traumatic head injury (skull fracture) or bleed in the
Compression
brain. It is not essential to try and diagnose the
type of head injury, as all are serious and qualified
emergency help should be summoned.
Symptoms
• Dizzyness, confusion
• Possible nausea or vomiting
• Possible short term memory loss
• Headache (mild – intense)
• Possible seizures
Signs
• Changes in skin colour (pale, clammy
or flushed)
• Unusual breathing pattern
• Dilated pupil(s)
• Blood or fluid coming from an ear
or the nose
• Bleeding, swelling or bruising of the head
• Soft area or depression in the skull
Treatment
• If conscious, help the casualty to lie down and
keep the head, neck and body in line in case
there is a neck injury
• Look for and treat any other injuries
• If unconscious and you are sure the casualty
is breathing normally, place the casualty into
the recovery position and monitor breathing
regularly (see recovery position page 172)
NPLQ Generation 9
3.24 Chest injuries
A chest injury may occur when a sharp object penetrates the chest wall. This may cause severe and life
threatening internal damage within the upper abdomen or chest. A penetrating chest injury may also
damage the lungs. Penetrating chest injuries can be caused by objects such as a knife, metal spike or
screw driver as examples.
Chest injuries can also be caused by a blunt force trauma as a result of a heavy blow or fall. This can cause
ribs to fracture. Lower rib fractures can injure internal organs such as the spleen or liver.
Chest injuries are serious as they can affect the ability of the casualty to breathe and cause severe pain.
3.24.1 Penetrating Chest Injury

A penetrating chest injury can allow air to be sucked
into the chest cavity causing the lung to collapse.
Symptoms
• Difficult and painful breathing that can be rapid,
uneven or shallow
• Severe and acute pain
Signs
• Where there is an open wound, you may hear
air being sucked into the chest cavity
• Blue / grey skin colour
• Frothy coughed up blood
• Bubbling blood from the wound
• Sound of air being sucked in through the
wound as the casualty breathes in
Treatment
• Sit the casualty in the most comfortable position leaning towards the injured side
• Do not try to cover an open chest wound*
• Control associated bleeding with direct pressure
• As long as the casualty remains conscious support in the same position.
• If the casualty becomes unconscious and you are sure they are breathing normally place them in the
recovery position (with the injured side down) and monitor breathing regularly (see recovery position
page 172)
• If the casualty is not breathing normally start CPR
*It is important not to cover open chest wounds with an occlusive (airtight) dressing, as this may allow
pressure to build up inside the chest and interfere with lung function (tension pneumothorax).
3.24.2 Flail Chest

Where ribs have been fractured in several places this can create a section of ribs that can cause a ‘Flail
Chest’. This can be identified when a casualty breathes in and their chest wall expands as normal, however
the flail section moves in and when the casualty exhales the section moves out whilst the chest wall moves
back in (paradoxical chest movements).
Symptoms
• Painful shallow breathing
• Severe difficulty whilst trying to breathe
• Symptoms of a fracture
Signs
• Paradoxical chest movements
223
Treatment
• Sit the casualty in the most comfortable position leaning towards the injured side
• Support the arm on the injured side to help keep the weight of the arm off the injury (an elevation sling
can be applied)
• If the casualty becomes unconscious and you are sure they are breathing normally place them in the
recovery position (with the injured side down) and monitor breathing regularly (see recovery position
page 172)
• If the casualty is not breathing normally, start CPR
3.24.3 Fractured Ribs

Fracture of one or more ribs is usually caused by direct force on the chest, such as from a fall, a blow or a
crush injury. Although rib fractures can be very painful, most heal on their own. It is important, however, to
be aware that such injuries can be serious if the underlying lung is punctured, or there is significant internal
bleeding, and casualties should be assessed by a healthcare professional.
Symptoms and Signs
• Pain at the site of the injury
• Swelling or tenderness
• Difficulty breathing
• Bruising at the site
Treatment
• Help the casualty sit down
• Support their arm on the injured side
• Arrange transport to hospital
3.25 Eye Injuries

Particles of grit, dust, loose eyelashes or contact lenses are the most common foreign objects found in the
eyes. They stick to the inner surface of the eyelid causing discomfort and inflammation. In most cases they
can be removed easily.
Any eye injury is potentially serious and can result in damage, infection or in extreme cases blindness. Never
attempt to remove a foreign body if it is on the coloured part of the eye or embedded in the eyeball.
Eye irritation can be caused by pool chemicals.
Symptoms
• Itchy
• Pain in or around the eye
• Vision may be impaired
Signs
• Eye may water
• Redness and swelling around the eye
• Inability to open the injured eye
Treatment
• Take particular care if the casualty is wearing contact lenses
• Advise the casualty not to rub the eye
• Gently separate the eyelids with your finger and thumb
• Examine the eye
• If you can see a foreign body, wash it out with a sterile solution or tap water, tilting the head to ensure
water runs away from the good eye
• If this does not work, carefully apply an eye pad to the affected eye, tell the casualty to close their
good eye to help keep the injured eye still
• Make arrangements for the casualty to get medical help (even when the item has been removed)
NPLQ Generation 9
If it is a chemical injury
• Wash the eye with a continuous flow of cool water for at least 20 minutes, tilting the head to ensure
water runs away from the good eye
• Where possible give the details of the chemical to the emergency services on arrival (these can be
found on the bottle, container or product/safety data sheet)
3.26 Dental Injuries

Symptoms
• Pain
• Difficulty speaking
Signs
• Bleeding
• Swelling
• Damage to tooth/teeth
Treatment
Where a tooth is broken or chipped:
• Retrieve any broken parts and store in cow’s milk
• Encourage the casualty to rinse their mouth with warm water
• Seek immediate attention from a dentist
Where a tooth is knocked out:
• If possible, ask the casualty to place the tooth back into the socket (pick the tooth up by the crown
and rinse it under cold water for a maximum of 10 seconds)
• If this is not possible, rinse it under cold water for a maximum of 10 seconds and wrap the tooth in
cling film. Alternatively if water is not available store in cow’s milk
• Seek immediate attention from a dentist, taking the tooth with them
• Where the socket is bleeding, get the casualty to bite on a sterile pad and maintain pressure
3.27 Fainting
Fainting is caused by a temporary reduction in
the blood supply to the brain. It may begin with a
feeling of dizziness and lead to collapse, and the
most common causes are:
• Injury
• Illness
• Fatigue
• Long periods in a hot stuffy atmosphere
• Long periods of standing still
Symptoms
A casualty may feel or have the following prior to
fainting:
• Nausea
• Blurred vision
• Black spots in front of the eyes
225
Signs
• Face may become pale
• Sweat may be visible on the face, neck and hands
• Brief unconsciousness
• Cold clammy skin
• Shallow breathing
• Slow, weak pulse
Treatment
When someone feels they are about to faint:
• Reassure them
• Advise them to breathe deeply but slowly
• Lay them down and raise their legs
• Loosen any tight clothing
• Where possible, ask bystanders to leave the area to help the casualty relax/remain calm
• When they recover, give them sips of water
In a full faint:
• Lay the casualty down
• Raise the casualty’s legs
• Check their airway and breathing is normal
• If the casualty does not come round quickly and your are sure they are breathing normally, place them
in the recovery position and monitor breathing, call 999/112 for emergency help
3.28 Stroke
A stroke is when there is either a blood clot in the
brain or ruptured blood vessel in the brain causing
pressure on the brain. Both are very serious
conditions.
Symptoms and Signs:

A good way to establish the signs and symptoms
is as follows (FAST):
Face – Facial weakness – can the person smile,
has their mouth or side of their face drooped?
Arms – Can they raise both their arms?
Speech – Can the casualty speak clearly and can
they understand you?
Time – It’s time to dial 999/112 immediately if you
see any of these signs or symptoms.
Treatment:
• Keep the casualty comfortable. If they are responding, lay them down with their head and shoulders
slightly raised
• Re-assure them, but remember that if they have a problem with their speech they may have difficulty
in answering questions
• Monitor their responsiveness and breathing constantly
• If they become unconscious and you are sure they are breathing normally, place them in the recovery
position and continue to monitor their breathing
NPLQ Generation 9
3.29 Poisoning – drug, alcohol,
chemical and gases
Poisons can enter the body through:
• The mouth through ingestion
• The mouth and nose through inhalation
• The eyes through absorption
• The skin by injection or absorption
Drug abuse
Drug poisoning can result from recreational use of illegal drugs or by accidental or deliberate misuse of
legitimate medication.
Alcohol abuse
Alcohol poisoning can result from consumption or excessive consumption of alcohol.
Release of chemicals or gases

A release of chemicals or gases may occur in the plant room or chemical store of swimming pools.
Safety precautions set out clearly in the EAP and by the manufacturers must always be followed, You will
be trained in the use of chemicals at the facility to comply with the Control of Substances Hazardous to
Health regulation (COSHH).
THERE ARE MANY POTENTIAL POISONS WITH ACCOMPANYING SIGNS AND SYMPTOMS.
THE CASUALTY MAY DISPLAY SOME OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:
Symptoms
• Difficulty breathing
• Dizziness
• Nausea
• Abdominal pains
• Confusion
• Head ache
Signs
• Evidence of the poisonous substance e.g. chemical, drugs, medication, food
• Unusual smell in area or on breath e.g. gases
• Vomiting
• Burns and swelling
• Pale skin
Treatment
• Move the casualty to a safe place

• Remove cause (where possible)
• Do not induce vomiting
• For swallowed corrosive substances, rinse the mouth and give sips of water or milk
• Treat injuries e.g. burns
• If CPR is required use a face mask (barrier resuscitation)
• Collect and pass on to emergency services any information about the poison
227
Gas/Chemical leak
Call 999/112 for emergency help and the fire brigade should be summoned in accordance with the EAP.
Firefighters and emergency services will need to be told what type of fumes or chemicals were involved
in the incident.
Closed space
If casualties are in a closed space and you suspect there are poisonous fumes, do not attempt a rescue
unless there is breathing apparatus available and you and your team are trained in its use. You must have
support from other team members. Open doors and windows for ventilation, provided this does not put
others at risk or contaminate other parts of the premises.
Sources of information
Information about poisons is can be vital for emergency personnel to give effective treatment.
Sources of information may include:
• Container label
• Material safety data sheet
• Emergency phone line (may be included in the above)
3.30 Insect bites and stings

Stings from bees, wasps and hornets are usually more painful and alarming than dangerous, although
some people are allergic to the poison and multiple stings from a swarm of insects can be very dangerous.
In either case, there is a risk of anaphylactic shock.
Stings in the mouth and throat can cause swelling leading to suffocation.
Symptoms
• The casualty will complain of pain
Signs
• In most cases, there will be swelling in the area around the sting, there may be redness
Treatment
• If visible, try to remove the sting by brushing it out of and away from the skin using, for example, a
fingernail or a plastic card such as a credit card. Do not use tweezers as this may squeeze the poison
into the casualty
• Apply a cold compress to relieve pain and swelling (for up to 20 minutes)
• For stings in the mouth the casualty should suck ice for immediate relief, call 999/112
• For severe stings see treatment for anaphylactic shock
NPLQ Generation 9
3.31 Diabetic Emergency
Diabetes is a metabolic disorder that causes a person’s blood
sugar level to become high.
Most of the food we eat is turned into glucose, or sugar, for our
bodies to use for energy. The pancreas, an organ that lies near
the stomach, makes a hormone called insulin to help glucose
get into the cells of our bodies.
People diagnosed with diabetes may need to take tablets and/
or inject insulin as their pancreas does not work adequately.
A diabetic emergency can occur when there is:
• Too little sugar (hypoglycaemia)
• Too much sugar (hyperglycaemia)
Both conditions are extremely serious and unless treated, can
result in unconsciousness and eventually death.
Hypoglycaemia
Hypoglycaemia is usually characterised by a rapidly
deteriorating level of responsiveness. It is the diabetic
emergency you are most likely to encounter, and is brought on
by exercise, insufficient food, or excess insulin treatment.
Symptoms
• Loss of concentration
• Rapid pulse
• Faintness or dizziness
• Trembling of the limbs
• Confusion
• Occasionally aggressive (mood swings)
Signs
• Pale skin
• Profuse sweating
• Shallow breathing
• Unconsciousness
• The casualty could easily be mistaken for someone who is drunk
Treatment
Conscious casualty:
• Sit them down and give them a sugary drink, or some other form of sugar (glucose tablets or 15-20g
glucose e.g. 150ml glass of non-diet fizzy drink or fruit juice or 3 teaspoons of sugar)
• If the casualty responds give further sugary food or drink. Let them rest and advise them to seek
further medical advice
• If they do not respond to treatment call 999/112 for emergency help
Unconscious casualty:
• If you are sure the casualty is breathing normally place them into the recovery position and monitor
breathing
• Monitor airway and breathing
• Carry out CPR if required
DO NOT give anything by mouth to an unconscious casualty or someone who is having
difficulty maintaining their airway or with swallowing
Hyperglycaemia would normally develop very gradually and a diabetic casualty would recognise some
symptoms and signs and manage their own treatment e.g. excessive thirst, increased need to urinate and
drowsiness. Another indication is rapid pulse and breathing with a sweet, fruity smell on their breath. If a
casualty is found to be hyperglycaemic you should call 999/112 for emergency help.
229
3.32 Seizures and Epilepsy

Seizures occur when normal brain activity is suddenly disrupted. This can be caused by a number of
different illnesses or injuries.
Some casualties may be diagnosed with epilepsy which is currently defined as a tendency to have
recurrent seizures.
Some individuals that have been diagnosed may sense a seizure is coming on.
3.32.1 Seizures (sometimes called a fit or convulsion)

Signs
• Casualty may collapse suddenly, breath out and stiffen, sink to the bottom of the pool without warning
• The muscles stiffen and back may arch
• Lips may go blue
• Limbs of body may make sudden jerking movements
• Eyes may roll
• Teeth may clench (never put anything in the mouth) and saliva may drool from the mouth
• Breathing could be loud like snoring
• Casualty may lose control of bladder or bowel
Treatment
For seizures in the water:
• During a seizure, support the casualty to keep their face clear of the water
• Take care that the casualty’s head does not hit you or the poolside
• If possible, support the casualty in shallow water away from the sides until the seizure is over
• Once the seizure has finished remove the casualty from the pool
• Once the seizure has finished the casualty may feel tired and fall into a deep sleep
• Monitor the casualty’s breathing
• Be prepared to start CPR if needed
• Call 999/112 for emergency help for anyone who has a seizure in the water as water may
have been inhaled
• Do not restrain the casualty and only move them if there is a danger of injury or falling into the water
For seizures out of the water:
• Objects which could cause injury should be removed
• Protect the head (put something soft underneath the head if the casualty is on a hard surface)
• Loosen any clothing around the casualty’s neck that may restrict breathing
• Time the seizure to note exact time and duration
Once the seizure is over:
• The casualty should rest quietly until they are fully recovered
• The casualty may feel tired and fall into a deep sleep
• If you are sure the casualty is breathing normally place them into the recovery position and monitor
breathing
• Following recovery, if the seizure was different from or lasted longer than normal for the casualty, they
should seek medical advice
Remember you should be suspicious of cardiac arrest in any casualty presenting with seizures,
and you must assess the casualty for normal breathing once the seizures have ended
Call 999/112 for emergency help if:
• The seizure lasts longer than 5 minutes
• The casualty has had a second seizure
• The casualty has injured themselves
• This is the casualty’s first ever seizure
• The casualty does not wake up after 10 minutes of recovery
• You are unsure
NPLQ Generation 9
3.32.2 Absence Seizures
Absence seizures appear as if the casualty is day dreaming and are common in children. This may last for
just a few seconds and the casualty may often be unaware that it has happened.
Symptoms and signs

• Common signs are jerking and twitching
• Casualty plucking at their clothes
• Swallowing repeatedly
• Lip smacking
• Wandering around appearing dazed
Treatment
• Support the casualty with their head above water
• Guide the casualty away from the pool or any danger
• Help the casualty to sit or lie down in a quiet place
• Stay with the casualty until they are fully alert
3.33 Heat and cold injuries

3.33.1 Heat Exhaustion
Heat exhaustion usually develops gradually and results from loss of salt and water from the body by
excessive sweating and/or dehydration.
Symptoms
• Nausea
• Loss of appetite
• Headaches
• Dizziness or confusion
• Rapid, weakening pulse and breathing
• Muscle cramp
Signs
• Sweating
• Pale clammy skin
Treatment
• Move the casualty to a cool place
• Encourage them to sip water, tea or milk (if they are thirsty) or to rehydrate with an isotonic sports drink
• Assist the casualty to lie down and raise their legs

• Cool the skin, however do not allow them to get too cold
231
3.33.2 Hypothermia
Medically, hypothermia starts when the casualty’s
core body temperature falls below 35°C. Even
if the drop in temperature does not go below
this point, casualties may still suffer ill effects,
particularly the very old and very young. Core body
temperature will drop if the body loses more heat
than it can produce. This could be caused by:
• Exhaustion
• Intoxication from drugs or alcohol
• Immobilisation caused by injury or accident
• Immersion in cold water/long periods in
cool water
• Cold weather conditions
Symptoms
• Cold
• Very slow pulse
• Tired
Signs
Sometimes, the body’s cooling can happen without anyone noticing, so it’s important to be aware of the
risk. Early signs include:
• Shivering
• Changes in behaviour
• Slurred speech
• Confusion and/or forgetfulness
• Stiffening of muscle
• Pale, cold skin
• Infants may become quiet
Treatment
• Summon emergency services
• Handle the casualty gently, because in severe cases rushed treatment or movement may cause the
heart to stop
• Move the casualty to a warm place
• Remove wet clothing
• Assist the casualty to sit in a comfortable position
• Wrap blankets around the casualty to gradually increase their body temperature
• In remote circumstances, or if the casualty is wet, put them in a plastic bag up to their neck (this
develops a localised warm environment) and cover their head to prevent further heat loss
• Sip a warm drink and eat high energy food (chocolate)
• Maintain close observation of the casualty’s breathing and level of consciousness
Do not re-warm the casualty too quickly (e.g. sitting next to a heater) as this draws blood to the
surface of the body, potentially causing blood pressure to fall and shock
NPLQ Generation 9
3.34 Secondary survey
A secondary survey is only to be completed when life threatening injuries or conditions have been
stabilised or ruled out (primary survey).
The secondary survey is a process to check for injuries and illnesses. You identify history, symptoms and
signs as you conduct a thorough examination of a casualty, as often injuries can be masked by other
injuries, pains, medical conditions or if the casualty is unconscious.
You should talk to the casualty throughout to explain what you are doing and ask them to describe
symptoms or pain.
Use your senses:
• Look
• Listen
• Feel
• Smell
Key points for a secondary survey (top to toe):
• Ask permission of the casualty
• Ask the casualty if they have any pain and if so where?
• Protect privacy of the casualty
• Protect yourself – gloves
• Do not move the casualty more than is strictly necessary
• Check with the casualty about any medical conditions
• Check with the casualty about any medication they may be taking
Where there is the possibility of injuries that have not been identified, carry out a secondary survey whilst
ensuring the casualty’s airway is maintained, treating any life threatening injuries prior to turning them into
the recovery position (see page 172).
Whilst carrying out a secondary survey it is important to return to the primary survey and check
for normal breathing frequently (if the casualty is unconscious) and treat appropriately.
As with all first aid, protecting the airway is the overriding priority, so if at any time you are concerned about
the airway, place the casualty into the recovery position, then continue with the secondary survey.
Removing clothing
If the casualty is wearing clothing, you might have to move/remove some clothing to complete the
secondary survey and treat their injuries. Do this with the least possible disturbance to their position, and
remove only as much clothing as necessary.
If you have to remove clothing, where possible to reassure the casualty, the first aider should be the same
sex as the casualty.
Check on all parts of body in sequence below:

• Bleeding
• Bruising/swelling
• Protruding bones
• Deformity/fracture
• Casualty reaction
• Pain
Fill in what these signs and

Part of the body
symptoms might Indicate.
Breathing
• Slow/fast •
• Deep/shallow •
1
• Regular/irregular •
• Odour •
233
Fill in what these signs and

Part of the body
symptoms might Indicate.
Head (Scalp, face, ears, nose)
• Fluid from ears/nose •
• Indentations/softness •
2
• Pupil dilation •
• Colour of skin •
• Clamminess •
Mouth
• Obstruction •
• Vomit •
3
• Tongue laceration •
• Teeth/loose dentures •
Neck
• Medic alert •
• Pulse •
4
Chest
• Rise/fall with breathing •
Arms
• Medic alert bracelet •
• Needle marks •
6
• Movement (without pain) •
Abdomen
• Rigidity •
• Tenderness •
7
Pelvis
• Incontinence •
8 Do not rock or squeeze

the pelvis
Legs & Feet

• Movement (without pain) •
NPLQ Generation 9
3.35 Checking Pulse to monitor casualty
Pulse Check
The pulse is a wave of pressure in the blood stream created by each heartbeat. The pulse gives three
indications about how the heart is working:
• Rate (beats per minute)
• Strength (strong or weak)
• Rhythm (regular or irregular)
A normal heart rate for adults is 60–100 beats per minute
(bpm) at rest, although this may be slower in very fit adults
and more rapid in children.
Measuring Pulse Rate in Children and Adults

Radial (Wrist) Pulse
• Support the casualty’s arm extended (straight),
with the palm facing up
• Place the pads of two or three fingers below the
wrist creases at the base of the casualty’s thumb
• Locate the pulse, and count how many beats occur
in one minute
Carotid (Neck) Pulse
• Place the pads of two fingers beneath the casualty’s
jaw between the large neck muscle
and the windpipe
• Locate the pulse, and count how many occur
in one minute
Measuring Pulse Rate in Infants (Brachial Pulse)
• Position the infant in a comfortable position
• Place the pads of two fingers on the inside of
the casualty’s upper arm
• Locate the pulse, and count how many occur
in one minute
SAFETY NOTICE – Pulse checks should not be used as part of the CPR sequence as detailed
within this manual.
Pulse checks may be used whilst monitoring a normal breathing casualty and to help determine
appropriate first aid treatment.
3.36 Moving and handling casualties

Never move an ill or injured person unless their life is in danger or there’s some other very urgent need
to move them. Leave them undisturbed, call for emergency help and give first aid on the spot. Moving a
casualty increases the chance of making an injury worse or even causing another injury.
If, for example, the casualty is at risk of drowning, cold injury, poisonous gas or fire (remember not to put
yourself at risk) you may have no choice but to move them as quickly and carefully as possible.
How you move them depends on several factors:
• The kind of injury they have and how serious it is
• If they are conscious and able to walk
• If they are conscious but not able to walk
• If they are unconscious
• If you suspect a spinal injury
• The casualty’s weight
• The number of team members or helpers available
• The distance to be covered e.g. to the first aid room
235
The only time you should ever move a seriously injured casualty on your own is if there is no one available
to help and the danger is really serious. Always make sure that everyone involved, including the casualty
whether you think they are conscious or not, knows exactly what is going to happen and what they must
do. Always give clear instructions before each movement.
All lifting should be done by as many trained people as possible with only one person, usually the person
at the heaviest part of the body, giving instructions. Where possible, use a stretcher or rescue board if you
have to move a casualty any distance.
3.37 AFTER THE ACCIDENT/INCIDENT

3.37.1 Clean Up
As detailed in Hygiene Procedures it is important to:
• Mop up any spills of blood or other body fluids
• Disinfect with a specialised cleaning agent for body fluids
• Place any used dressings or contaminated material in a yellow clinical waste bag or bin
3.37.2 Fill Up
Remember to restock the first aid box and other
equipment with any items that have been used to
ensure it is ready for any future first aid use.
3.37.3 Write Up
All accidents/incidents in the workplace must be
recorded. This may be in an accident book or
accident report form.
Details in the record should include:
• Name, age and address of the casualty
• The date, time and location of the accident/
incident
• Details of how the accident happened
• Details of the injuries sustained
• Name, age and position of the First Aider who
treated the casualty
It is important that accidents are recorded so they
can be investigated to prevent a recurrence and trends can be identified. These documents could be used
for the purposes of insurance claims, or in extreme cases, in a court of law.
RIDDOR (Reporting of Injuries, Diseases and Dangerous Occurrence Regulation 2013) requires employers
to report certain accidents to the Health and Safety Executive, these accidents include:
• Death
• Major injuries
• Dangerous occurrences
• Incidents resulting in a person being off work for more than 7 days
• Diseases
• A member of public is taken directly to hospital
NPLQ Generation 9
Accident Report Form
Complete the accident report form below
About the person who had the accident 1

Name
Address
City/Town Postcode Telephone
Occupation
details of the person reporting this accident 2

Name
Address
City/Town Postcode Telephone
Occupation
details of accident/injury 3
Date: DD MM YYYY Time: HH MM
Where did the accident/injury take place?
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Say how the accident happened, give a cause if you can
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Details of accident/injury
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Signed Date: DD MM YYYY
237
Choose 3 injuries taken from the first aid syllabus and complete the lifeguard early intervention column
detailing what action a lifeguard could take to prevent an injury or reduce the severity.
Example:
Injury Lifeguard Early Intervention
• Suspected fracture to the forearm • Apply no running rules to reduce the number of
potential slips or falls
• Apply good lifeguard supervision principles no
acrobatics. Gymnastics, boisterous fighting etc.
Exercise:
Injury Lifeguard Early Intervention
NPLQ Generation 9
1. What are the priorities of first aid?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Before treating a casualty with an injury, what should a lifeguard obtain?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. What would you find in a first aid box?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
4. What is the difference between a symptom and a sign?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. What is the treatment for an unconscious casualty?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
6. What treatment should you give to a casualty suffering a heart attack?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. What is the treatment for shock?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
8. What is the treatment for a bleed?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
9. How would you treat someone suffering from a nose bleed?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
10. What 4 factors affect the severity of a burn?
D _____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
L _____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
S _____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
C _____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
11. What is the treatment for a burn?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
12. What are the main principles of dealing with a suspected fracture?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
239

13. What is the treatment for a dislocation?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
14. What is the treatment for a sprain or a strain?
i) R __________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
ii) I ___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
iii) C _________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
iV) E _________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
15. Give 3 symptoms of a head injury
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
16. What could cause someone to faint?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
17. What are the principles of treating a casualty who has suffered a stroke?
i) F ___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
ii) A __________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
iii) S _________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
iV) T _________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
18. How should you treat someone suffering a major seizure?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
19. What is the treatment for cramp?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
20. Give 3 signs of a penetrating chest injury?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
21. Give 3 symptoms of a flail chest?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
NPLQ Generation 9
22. A poison can enter the body in which 4 ways?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
23. What 3 sources of information would help the emergency services when treating a casualty who
has been poisoned by a chemical?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
24. Name 3 triggers of anaphylaxis?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
25. Give 3 symptoms and signs of anaphylaxis?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
26. How would you treat a casualty who has hypoglycaemia?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
27. How would you recognise someone having an asthma attack and how would you treat this?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
28. Give 3 symptoms of hyperventilation?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
29. How would you treat a dental injury

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
30. Name 3 symptoms of:

Heat exhaustion Hypothermia
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
31. Give 10 things you would look for when completing a secondary survey on a casualty?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
241
Glossary of Terms and Abbreviations
• 10:20 – To scan your zone within 10 seconds and to be able to reach an incident in the furthest part of
the zone within 20 seconds
• ACoP – Approved Code of Practice – best practice that has the weight of the law behind it
• Acts – Acts of Parliament make up the primary legislation within the UK and Ireland and can apply to
businesses and individuals both in general society and also whilst at work
• AED – Automated External Defibrillator
• Anaphylactic Shock – a serious, potentially fatal condition caused by a massive allergic reaction
• Asphyxia – when the body can’t get enough oxygen
• Asthma Attack – muscles of the air passages go into spasm and narrow the airway, this and the
accumulation of mucus in the airway, causes shortness of breath and wheezing
• Blind Spots – restricted visibility caused by obstructions
• Cardiac Arrest – when the heart stops pumping
• Cardio – anything relating to the heart
• Chain of Survival – the key stages in the life support sequence
• Child – is defined, for the purposes of resuscitation, to be from the first year of life to 18 years
• Choking – when a piece of food or other material is swallowed but goes down the trachea (windpipe)
rather than the oesophagus (gullet)
• Circulation – blood being pumped round the body by the heart
• Competency – the ability to do something successfully
• Concussion – an altered level of consciousness, disorientation, confusion, lack of ability to remember or

unconsciousness after a blow or other injury to the head
• Control Measures – something you do/that is put in place to reduce the risk of the hazard causing harm
• CPR – Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation – chest compressions and breaths given to someone who is
unresponsive and not breathing/not breathing normally
• Cramp – sudden, involuntary and painful contraction of a muscle
• Diabetes – caused by a disturbance in the body’s ability to regulate blood sugar levels
• Dislocation – when a bone or joint is displaced
• Diversity – aims to recognise, respect and value people’s differences, variety and individuality
• Early Intervention – prompt and immediate action to prevent and incident or accident occurring or
reducing the severity of an emergency
• Emergency Action Plan (EAP) – action to be taken in the event of a foreseeable emergency
• Equality – ensuring individuals or groups of individuals are treated fairly and equally
NPLQ Generation 9
• Fainting – temporary reduction in the blood supply to the brain
• FAST – a good way to establish the signs and symptoms of casualty suffering from a stroke – Face,
Arms, Speech, Time
• Flail chest – where a section of the rib cage breaks under extreme pressure and becomes detached
from the rest of the chest wall. The flail section moves in the opposite direction as the rest of the chest
wall, it goes in while the rest of the chest is moving out and vice versa
• Guidance – guidance sits underneath law and is designed to assist the operator in meeting its legal
obligations set out in the Acts and Regulations
• Hazard – something with the potential to cause harm
• Heart Attack – interruption in the blood supply to the heart itself such as a blood vessel becoming
blocked resulting in the heart muscle being starved of oxygen
• Heat Exhaustion – loss of salt and water from the body by excessive sweating and/or dehydration
• HSG 179 – HSE Publication Managing Health and Safety in Swimming Pools
• Hyperglycaemia – too much blood sugar
• Hyperventilation – excessive breathing
• Hypoglycaemia – too little blood sugar
• Hypothermia – when the casualty’s core body temperature falls below 35°C
• Infant – is defined, for the purposes of resuscitation, as in the first year of life
• LZVT – Lifeguard Zone Visibility Test
• Major Emergency – is serious – even life threatening
• Minor Emergency – poses little danger
• Normal Operating Plan (NOP) – gives a detailed description of the day–to–day operation of the pool
• NPLQ – National Pool Lifeguard Qualification
• Observation – means watching the activities without taking any direct action
• Out of Water Emergency – happens on the poolside or elsewhere on site

• Pool Safety Operating Procedures (PSOP) – required by law, written after a risk assessment and is
made up of two parts – the EAP and the NOP
• Primary Survey – assessing the casualty for life threatening injuries and taking immediate and
appropriate action
• PTSD – Post Traumatic Stress Disorder
• Pulmonary – anything relating to the lungs and how we breathe
• Pulse – a wave of pressure in the blood stream created by each heartbeat
243
Glossary of Terms and Abbreviations
• Regulations – The Health and Safety At Work Act makes provision to enable regulations to be made,
and enacted into law, again these directly impact on businesses and individuals
• Regurgitation – the return of partially digested food from the stomach to the mouth
• Rescue Pathway – sequence of actions when carrying out a rescue
• Respiration – breathing – getting air in and out of our lungs
• R–I–C–E – the order of treatment to a soft tissue injury – rest, ice, comfortable position, elevation
• Risk – how likely it is that harm will actually be caused
• Risk Assessment – estimates the amount of risk involved
• RLSS UK – Royal Life Saving Society UK
• Safeguarding – scheme to minimise the risk of harm posed to children and vulnerable adults by those
that might seek to harm them through their work
• SCIM – Spinal Cord Injury Management
• Secondary Survey – involves determining the background to an injury, assessing the mechanics of
the injury, looking for signs and determining symptoms and conducting a thorough examination of the
casualty
• Seizure – when normal brain activity is suddenly disrupted
• Sharps – any object capable of cutting or piercing the skin such as needles
• Shock – failure of the circulation, which leads to an inadequate supply of blood to vital organs
• Sign – an obvious physical indication of injury – which might be bruising, an obvious problem with a joint
or limb, respiratory failure or bleeding, in other words, something you can actually see
• Splinter – small objects that pierce the skin
• Stroke – when there is either a blood clot in the brain or ruptured blood vessel in the brain causing
pressure on the brain
• Supervision – means directing the activity to take more control of the way a swimmer behaves
• Symptom – a description that the casualty gives you – possibly stiffness, loss of feeling, tenderness,
pain or temperature
• Tracheostomy – an opening to the windpipe (stoma) in the front of the neck
NPLQ Generation 9
CANDICE RLSS UK Lifeguard
ARNOLD membership
RLSS UK LIFEGUARD
FOR OVER 8 YEARS For just £15* you will receive:
“ The RLSS UK
Lifeguard Membership • Limited edition ‘Just your
free online learning has everyday hero’ #lifeguard T-shirt.
been worth its weight in
gold. It has really helped • Online Learning for Continuing
to keep my skills and Professional Development and
knowledge up to date so that I can return to “ contribution towards CPD hours
lifeguarding fully prepared and raring to go.
required for renewal.
• Personal Injury Insurance,
Professional Indemnity and Public
steve Liability Insurance.
carter • Advice Helplines - including
Lifeguard and counselling, legal, personal tax,
trainer for over
20 years medical and bereavement.
“ At just £15* a year,

the RLSS UK Lifeguard
• Access to the RLSS UK Lifeguard
Closed Facebook Group - a unique
Membership package
offers NPLQ holders
space for lifeguards to connect.
exceptional value for
“ • Benefits Platform - with offers on
money, and I would
recommend that all lifeguards sign up. everything from clothes and days
out to adventure holidays.
ANNUAL RLSS UK LIFEGUARD MEMBERSHIP IS

AN ABSOLUTE STEAL AT JUST £15*.
To join our squad, log in to your RLSS UK Account, click on Membership & Clubs, then click on RLSS UK
Lifeguard Membership. If you haven’t activated your RLSS UK Account, visit www.rlss.org.uk/your-account
*2021 price correct at time of printing.
The Royal Life Saving Society UK (RLSS UK) is a registered

charity in England and Wales (1046060) and in Scotland (SC037912)
EVERYTHING YOU
NEED TO DO YOUR JOB
OFFICIAL UNIFORM & CLOTHING

ESSENTIAL SAFETY, FIRST AID &
TRAINING EQUIPMENT
100% OF ALL PROFIT

SHOP GOES INTO HELPING US
WITH EDUCATE MORE PEOPLE
PRIDE TO ENJOY WATER SAFELY.
SHOP NOW AT
SHOP.RLSS.ORG.UK/MY-JOB
Follow us for offers and promotions.
The Royal Life Saving Society UK (RLSS UK) is a registered charity in England, Wales (1046060), and Scotland (SC037912).
247
Candidate Notes
NPLQ Generation 9
249
Candidate Notes
NPLQ Generation 9
251
Candidate Notes
NPLQ Generation 9
253
Candidate Notes
NPLQ Generation 9
255
Candidate Notes
NPLQ Generation 9
Tel: 0300 323 0096
Visit: www.rlss.org.uk

RLSS UK National Pool Lifeguard Qualification E MANUAL 2022

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

RLSS UK National Pool Lifeguard Qualification E MANUAL 2022

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

RLSS UK National Pool Lifeguard Qualification E MANUAL 2022

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

THE LIFEGUARD

NATIONAL POOL LIFEGUARD

Sixth Edition (third revision) published in 2022 by

Text © Copyright 2022 by RLSS UK

First Edition 2001

Artwork, illustrations and photography © Copyright RLSS UK

Royal Life Saving Society UK

This qualification sits on the Regulated Qualifications Framework

What do lifeguards do?

What did you see?

Answer the following questions:

How many children and infants?_______________

How many swim aids are in use?______________

Where would you intervene?

Did you see anything dangerous or potentially dangerous?

Swimming POOL & SUPERVISION

SECTION 1: THE LIFEGUARD,

1.0 The Role of the Lifeguard

Maintaining a positive attitude

Providing good supervision

1.1.1 Overview of the Health and Safety Law as it Applies to Lifeguarding

Your Employers must:

1.1.2 Background to the Law and Regulations

Acts of Parliament (Acts)

Guidance on Swimming Pool Management

SECTION 1: THE LIFEGUARD,

Title Effect on Lifeguarding

Title Effect on Lifeguarding

SECTION 1: THE LIFEGUARD,

(iii) Mandatory sign – a sign prescribing specific behaviour (e.g. ‘eye

Title Effect on Lifeguarding

1.2 Maintaining Standards

1.3 Working as a team

Swimming POOL & SUPERVISION

SECTION 1: THE LIFEGUARD,

1.5 Customer Care

1.5.1 Maximising the Customer Experience

1.5.2 Customer Care Policy

Customer care charter

Customer care training for staff

Key performance indicators

Customer care rules

SECTION 1: THE LIFEGUARD,

Methods for obtaining and replying to staff feedback

1.5.4 Customer Care whilst Maintaining Supervision

Watch video of a poor example of how to ask a customer to change lane.

1.5.5 Customer Perception

Customer perceptions of a lifeguard should be:

Sometimes customers may have negative perceptions of a lifeguard such as:

SECTION 1: THE LIFEGUARD,

1.5.6 Dealing with Complaints

Dealing with the Public

Case study based on real life events

Swimming POOL & SUPERVISION

SECTION 1: THE LIFEGUARD,

1.6.1 Induction Training

Induction training is specific to the pool at which you work as

Sample Poolside Orientation Sheet

Date: Time: Zone:

Session type - General, lane or inflatable session etc: